According to the National Association of Realtors, the industry is vibrant and vigorously competitive, with a wealth of listing data available at consumers’ fingertips. Largely thanks to a pandemic-induced labor shift, new real estate agents are entering the market en masse. Not only has this further heightened the competition, but it’s led to a Darwinian effect that phases out less experienced realtors.

Fierce competition has motivated real estate professionals to explore new and creative marketing strategies to differentiate themselves from other agents and even online platforms. Creating real estate listing books is one of those strategies. 

Benefits of creating a real estate listing book

A real estate listing book, also called a “property” or “listing” book for short, is a powerful tool realtors use to present property information to potential buyers and sellers. A typical book contains comprehensive details about a property, including information about the listing, neighborhood, utilities, school system, HOA, and more. 

If you’re a realtor, no matter the stage of your career, standing out in an increasingly saturated industry is a must. Creating a real estate listing book is a tangible concept that can give you much-needed momentum in more ways than one.

• Targeted marketing: Property books enable you to target your audience based on factors like location, age, and preferences, allowing for more personalized and effective marketing.
• Positioning as an industry expert: Position yourself as an industry expert by creating and sharing real estate listing books, thereby increasing your credibility and visibility among potential clients.
• Differentiation and impressing sellers: A professionally created property book can differentiate you from the competition and impress sellers during listing presentations, ultimately leading to more successful sales.
• Comprehensive property information: Real estate listing books can provide comprehensive insights about a property, including specific information about the listing and surrounding area, which can be valuable for potential buyers.

Listing books aren’t limited to real estate agents, either. They’re an impactful tool for homeowners selling their properties independently or anyone interested in creating a visually appealing property listing presentation.

Interested in learning how to create a real estate listing book? Let’s explore what goes into it and the process behind it.

Gathering essential information for your listing book

The first step to creating a compelling real estate listing book is gathering all the essential information about your property. It’s not just about the number of bedrooms or bathrooms. It’s about painting a complete picture that tells the story of a property to potential buyers.

Start with basics like square footage, year built, and lot size. Then, delve into more detailed aspects such as architectural style, interior design features, and any recent renovations or upgrades that add value. Consider unique selling points, like the property’s proximity to top-rated schools, neighboring hiking trails, or local amenities. These small details make your property stand out in a crowded market.

High-quality photos

You can try to verbalize how beautiful a property is until you’re blue in the face, but nothing beats high-quality photos to show off its charm and appeal. Invest time (and possibly money) in professional photos, as they’re worth their weight in gold. Want to go the extra mile? Consider elevated shots like aerial photos taken from a drone or investing in professional photo editing to make each room pop.

Property history and neighborhood information

A home’s history tells a story. Has it been lovingly maintained by one family for decades? Or perhaps restored from ruin by an ambitious architect? And don’t neglect neighborhood details either: local amenities, parks, shops—it all matters. Research websites like the US Census Bureau, The National Neighborhood Data Archive (NaNDA), and the National Association of Realtors (NAR) to uncover local market data of interest.

Listing information

Finding this data might seem daunting, but fear not. You likely already have much of this information through previous listings and appraisal reports. As a real estate agent, your experience in the field gives you a head start. You’re familiar with tools like Zillow, MLS databases, and county records which are great resources for insights on comparable properties or neighborhood statistics. These platforms are not just for current listings but can be a treasure trove of historical data as well, which is invaluable for your book. Additionally, government land and property records can also be a helpful source of listing data, including property records, owner information, housing statistics, and more. This existing knowledge and these resources will be instrumental in creating a comprehensive and insightful book on real estate.

Assembling your book’s design and layout

Creating a captivating design for your real estate listing book can feel like learning a foreign language. But with proper resources and guidance, you’ll have it sorted in no time. A well-organized layout gives your book an attractive appeal that draws potential buyers to its content.

When designing your listing book, consider using professional design software like Adobe InDesign, Canva, or Blurb BookWright. The latter lets you easily create custom layouts with its intuitive interface and plethora of templates, making it easy for beginners to design a compelling book layout. But if this feels overwhelming or graphic design isn’t one of your strengths, consider hiring a professional designer.

Fonts and colors

Selecting fonts is not just about aesthetics but also readability. Choose clear fonts such as Arial or Times New Roman that are easy on the eyes while conveying professionalism. Similarly, color schemes should complement property photos without overpowering them—think soft neutrals or pastel tones.

Image formatting

Quality images sell homes faster than any other tool at your disposal. To maximize their impact, format each photo to fit perfectly within the allotted space on each page. Maintaining aspect ratios is crucial here to avoid distortion, so keep an eye on it when uploading photos.

Design templates

Pre-designed templates can save time by providing pre-set formats that ensure consistency across all pages. Blurb’s photo book templates or Canva’s diverse design options offer many choices perfect for showcasing properties. 

But whether you’re using a template or building your own, there are a few things to keep in mind.

• Balance: Maintain a balance between text and visuals. Overloading your pages with too much information can make your book look cluttered, making it harder for readers to focus on key details.
• Alignment: Keep elements properly aligned to create a neat and organized layout. This assists in guiding the reader’s eye through your content logically.
• Consistency: Keep styles consistent throughout your book. Inconsistencies, even small ones, can be jarring for readers and may undermine the professional appearance of your book.
• Whitespace: Make use of whitespace. It’s not necessary to fill every inch of the page. Whitespace can help highlight key elements and make the layout look clean and open.
• Call to Action (CTAs): Make sure your CTAs are clear and compelling. Whether it’s to schedule a viewing or contact the agent, CTAs play a critical role in the success of a listing.

Compelling cover

Never underestimate the impact of a captivating cover. It’s what initially grabs people’s attention. Think of your book cover as curb appeal, enticing enough to make potential clients want to learn more. These design principles will make buyers want to flip it open.

• Striking imagery: Use high-resolution, professional photos on the cover that represent the quality of properties inside the book. The images should be bright, crisp, and inviting, just like the homes you are showcasing.
• Typography, color scheme, and logo: Opt for clear and readable fonts that align with your brand. The color scheme should be pleasing to the eye and complement the images used on the cover. It also should align with the rest of your branding materials. Consistency in design fosters recognition and trust amongst your audience.
• Minimalistic design: Sometimes less is more. Opt for a clean, uncluttered cover design. This approach isn’t just about aesthetics, but about focusing the viewer’s attention on the most important elements, showcasing your ability to prioritize.
• Unique Selling Proposition (USP): Highlighting a key feature or unique aspect of your service or listings on the cover can set you apart from the competition.

A well-designed cover sets the tone for your entire real estate listing book—just like how beautiful landscaping enhances a home’s exterior before stepping inside. An extensive selection of cover options and design resources can help you create a custom cover that makes your listing book stand out.

Important sections

You need to guide your readers through the book, just as you would through a house. Navigation and sections do just that, providing readers with a structured understanding of the listed properties and making it easy for potential buyers to find exactly what they’re looking for in no time.

Not sure what to include? Typical sections, aside from the table of contents, include a welcome message, detailed pages for each property, neighborhood overviews, and a contact page. You can also add testimonials or success stories, company information, and agent profiles so that readers can get to know you and your business. Including these sections adds a personal touch while providing valuable information for buyers. Lastly, consider any necessary legal disclaimers or property disclosures, highlighting your commitment to transparency and ethical practices.

Remember, your design and layout should present properties in their best light and make information easy for potential buyers to digest. Strike a balance between simplicity, elegance, and professionalism.

Showcasing property features

Highlighting property features in your real estate listing book is more than just jotting down the home’s square footage and number of bedrooms. It’s about creating a vivid narrative of the potential buyer’s life in that home.

You’ll want to spotlight unique amenities, recent renovations, and other selling points that make the property stand out from others on the market. Let’s break it down:

Amenities

To help your listing resonate with potential buyers, mention key amenities like a gourmet kitchen or an integrated home security system. If there’s an outdoor space like a patio or pool area, highlight these as well.

Renovations

If you’re showcasing a home with recent upgrades, be sure to point them out. Updated kitchens and baths are always appealing. Newer roofs or HVAC systems may not be visually exciting, but they add value and peace of mind for prospective owners.

Key selling points

Last but certainly not least, identify unique aspects of the property to capture buyer interest: panoramic views and proximity to desirable schools or local attractions can boost appeal significantly. Today’s buyers also value multifunctional spaces, energy-efficient appliances, and smart home technology.

Beyond listing facts and figures, think about how you can tell a story through photos and words. By carefully curating how you present each feature, you create an engaging narrative around what makes this piece of real estate special.

Writing compelling listing descriptions

Crafting compelling and engaging listing descriptions is crucial in creating your real estate listing book. These descriptions give potential buyers an intimate look into the property and help them envision living there.

Capture the essence of the property

To start, capture the home’s essence with visceral language. For example, instead of simply stating “four bedrooms,” say “four spacious bedrooms filled with natural light.” In addition, highlight unique features such as original hardwood floors or custom cabinetry. These details can make a property stand out from others on the market.

The power of story

Storytelling plays an essential role when writing captivating listings. Paint a picture for potential buyers by sharing what it’s like to live in this house and neighborhood. Is it perfect for families? Close to local amenities? The key here is to be authentic but creative. Invite people to see why they would want this particular home over other available options.

Benefits, not features

Instead of simply listing off features (like a large backyard or an updated kitchen), explain how those features will benefit potential buyers. Does the big yard provide plenty of space for kids to play? Can a high-end kitchen make cooking more enjoyable? By highlighting these advantages, you’ll be able to connect with buyers on a deeper level and help them see the value in your property.

Proofread and polish

Finally, make sure to proofread your descriptions. Typos or grammatical errors can detract from the professional image you’re trying to present. A well-crafted, error-free listing description is like a magnet. It pulls in potential buyers and makes them want to learn more. Try these self-editing tips to help perfect your work without an editor.

Presentation and printing

When you’re ready to bring your real estate listing book to life, the quality of printing and presentation plays a huge role. The type of paper, cover material, and binding you choose can make or break that first impression. That’s where self-publishing platforms are valuable allies in creating listing books at the highest standards of professionalism and quality.

Paper quality

Don’t overlook choosing the right paper quality. High-grade paper, like Mohawk, widely recognized in the industry, offers a feeling of professional polish and attention to detail. Mohawk papers are known for their superior quality, durability, and excellent image reproduction, making them an ideal choice for showcasing high-resolution property images and crisp text. 

If affordability is a concern, consider using economy paper options or black-and-white printing. While these choices may be more cost-effective, they can still present your content in a clean and professional manner.

Cover materials

A sturdy cover protects your book and creates a positive first impression on potential buyers. A hardcover exudes luxury, durability, and excellence, while softcovers are more lightweight, portable, and affordable. Consider which option best represents the showcased property and your audience.

Proof copy

The final step is assembling your book and printing a single proof copy. Doing this allows you to see how the design and layout look in a physical form. It also ensures that your book is free of any errors or issues before printing multiple copies for distribution.

Distribution and marketing

Once published, it’s time to get your outstanding real estate listing book before the appropriate people. The key is a blend of both online and offline strategies.

Offline distribution

Let’s start with good old-fashioned face-to-face networking. Handing out your listing books at open houses or industry events gives people something tangible to remember you by. Also, consider leaving copies with relevant local businesses willing to help.

Direct mail can also be surprisingly effective. Sending tailored listing books directly to potential buyers in your area makes them feel special and shows you’re proactive about selling their future home.

Online distribution

In this digital age, many online distribution methods are at our disposal. Social media platforms like LinkedIn, Facebook, and even Pinterest offer vast networks for sharing virtual versions of your listings book. Make sure your posts link back to where prospective buyers can acquire a physical copy if interested.

Email marketing is another powerful tool. Sending a digital version of the listing book allows recipients quick access without requiring a physical copy. Services like Mailchimp make email list-building and marketing a breeze.

Effective marketing isn’t just about spreading the word but also about making that word enticing. So always pair your distribution efforts with compelling messaging that sells not just the properties but also you as an agent.

Creating your real estate listing book with Blurb

Creating real estate listing books is a vital strategy for setting yourself apart in the market, whether you’re an experienced realtor or an independent seller. They provide detailed insights and focused marketing while fostering strong connections with potential buyers. By combining thoughtful design, engaging storytelling, and thorough information, these books not only highlight the unique features of each property but also enhance your professional image and dedication. They go beyond showcasing properties by reinforcing your brand and making a lasting impression in the competitive world of real estate.

***

Blurb, an empowering self-publishing and marketing platform, equips you with professional bookmaking tools to unlock your creativity. Whether you prefer Blurb’s free design tool, BookWright, or leverage Adobe InDesign, Lightroom, and Photoshop integrations, you can effortlessly design your book. With an array of free, professionally designed templates and extensive customization options, you can publish a captivating listing book that enthralls prospective home buyers. Sign up to embark on your project.

The post How to create a real estate listing book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Fear of failure looms large. But equipped with the right strategies and mindset, you can embrace the uncertainty of creative risk-taking and turn potential setbacks into unimaginable progress.

Getting comfortable with taking creative risks doesn’t happen overnight. It’s about building confidence step by audacious step. Here, we set off to discover how to harness the initial spark within us. Because when we dare to take those leaps in our creative work, magic happens. With an open mind, let’s explore how pushing boundaries can lead to more vibrant creations and a richer experience along your artistic path.

What is creative risk-taking, and why is it important?

Creative risk-taking is the courage to put forward unique ideas and solutions, even when they stray from conventional paths. It’s about venturing into uncharted territory with your work, whether through a non-traditional approach to a project or expressing novel concepts that everyone might not immediately accept.

But why is this so crucial? Creativity thrives on originality and innovation, which inherently involve stepping beyond comfort zones. In both personal and professional realms, taking creative risks drives progress and can lead to significant breakthroughs. When we always play it safe, we limit our potential for discovery; there’s little room left for serendipitous finds or extraordinary success.

Industries evolve rapidly due to those who dare greatly. If we’re willing to challenge norms, we can pave the way for advancements others hadn’t imagined possible. 

Engaging in creative risk also allows us to grow by learning from new experiences and even failures. This process enriches our skill sets and boosts self-confidence because each attempt teaches us more about what works—and what doesn’t—fostering resilience.

Basically, without some level of creative risk-taking, growth stagnates. Ideas recycle instead of renewing themselves. Creative risks push boundaries that result in not just different but potentially better outcomes, making them essential ingredients in any recipe for sustained personal development or professional excellence.

What are the benefits of taking creative risks?

Embracing creativity and taking risks brings many benefits that can transform our personal lives and professional careers. Let’s unpack some of the key advantages.

• Expands comfort zones: Engaging in creative risks broadens your comfort zone. A study by Psychology Today found that people willing to take creative risks were more likely to believe in their creative ability, engage in creative activities, and achieve more creatively.
• Fosters innovation: Risk-taking is the fuel for innovation. When we step out with bold, original ideas, we set the stage for breakthroughs that could redefine an industry or start a new trend. 
• Breaks social barriers: Social risk-taking and creativity go hand-in-hand. According to researcher and author Todd Dewett, “To be creative…is to take a risk that your ideas will be critically evaluated.” Research supporting his statement shows social risk-taking is one of the strongest predictors of creative personality and ideation abilities.
• Enhances problem-solving skills: Creative risk encourages us to think differently about challenges, leading to unique solutions others might not have considered. A study by PLOS ONE revealed that creative people are energized by challenging and risky problems, reinforcing the link between creativity and risk-taking.
• Builds resilience: With every creative leap comes the possibility of failure—and invaluable lessons learned in bouncing back stronger than before. Exploring the connection between creativity and risk is crucial in overcoming mental blocks, biases, and fears that might limit creativity.
• Sharpens your competitive edge: In career terms, those known for innovative thinking stand out from peers and may be more likely to land opportunities for advancement or leadership roles.
• Drives personal growth: On a personal level, taking creative risks contributes significantly to self-discovery by revealing hidden strengths and talents you might not have realized you possessed. When you explore creative risks, you develop a newfound sense of adaptability and confidence as a creative.

By stepping into unknown waters with your creativity, you open yourself up to experiences that enrich your work and who you are as an individual—ultimately propelling you forward on multiple fronts.

15 strategies that enable creative risk-taking

As we delve into the heart of creative risk-taking, let’s consider some practical strategies that help promote a culture of innovation and boldness. We’ve designed these actionable strategies to encourage you to embrace risk-taking as an integral part of your creative journey.

1. Understand that creative risk-taking is essential for growth

Recognizing the importance of creative risk-taking is the first crucial step. It’s about acknowledging that you may limit personal and professional growth without it. This understanding helps build a mindset where you’re more open to experimenting and less fearful of potential failure. 

Embrace the idea that each risk presents an opportunity for learning and evolving. By internalizing this concept, you’ll find yourself more willing to entertain ideas outside your comfort zone, laying a solid foundation for innovation and progress.

2. Recognize your current creative comfort zone

To grow creatively, first, identify where you’re playing it safe. Take a moment to reflect on your recent projects. Which ones felt easy or routine? Those are likely within your comfort zone. Now, think about what lies just beyond that. What have you avoided due to uncertainty?

Try this exercise: List activities or ideas that make you slightly uncomfortable because they’re new or different. Aim to tackle one of these each week (or each day or month, depending on how grand they are). 

This practice gradually stretches your creative boundaries, helping dismantle those invisible walls built by repetition and caution. As TED speaker Dr. Kris Alexander highlights, embrace the idea that “having fun…as you break out of your comfort zone is the ultimate reward one can give.”

3. Identify fears that hinder your creative risk-taking

Understanding the fears that block your creative risks is a powerful strategy. Are you afraid of failure, criticism, or the unknown? Pinpoint these common deterrents by journaling about times when fear held you back.

As you journal, create a fear list with specific worries about your creative endeavors. Next to each fear, write down a counteraction: What’s one thing you can do to face this fear head-on? Mapping out strategies against these anxieties turns abstract fears into manageable obstacles.

4. Shift from a fear-based to a growth-oriented mindset

In her New York Times bestseller Big Magic, author Elizabeth Gilbert says, “Your fear will always be triggered by your creativity because creativity asks you to enter into realms of uncertain outcome, and fear hates uncertain outcome.” 

Moving away from fear requires rewiring your thought patterns. Start by recognizing thoughts that stem from fear and deliberately choose to see them as growth opportunities instead.

Try taking a mindfulness approach to rewire these patterns. When you catch yourself hesitating out of fear, pause and ask, “What can I learn or gain from this experience?” 

Replace each fearful thought with an affirmative one focused on potential growth outcomes. This conscious shift in perspective gradually builds a more adventurous, creative mindset ready for risk-taking.

5. Build confidence with low-stakes creative risks

Beginning with minor risks can significantly bolster your confidence. Look for opportunities where the stakes aren’t too high but still push you out of your routine and comfort zone.

Here’s a tip: Commit to a small creative project outside your usual scope. For instance, try writing a short poem or sketching something abstract if you’re more photography-oriented. Or, if creative writing is more of your domain, try exploring the world of visual arts through illustrating, painting, or making photos.

By setting and achieving these mini goals, you’ll see that the fallout from mistakes is often less dire than imagined, encouraging bolder steps in the future.

6. Embrace failure as a learning opportunity

Viewing failure as part of the creative process is transformative. It’s not a setback; it’s rich with lessons that pave the way for growth. Take it from the iconic American writer Dale Carnegie, who said, “Develop success from failures. Discouragement and failure are two of the surest stepping stones to success.”

Each time an effort doesn’t pan out, instead of dwelling on disappointment, make it routine to jot down three things you learned from the experience. This practice shifts focus from defeat to development, reinforcing that every misstep is progress in disguise.

7. Acknowledge your accomplishments

Regularly recognizing your creative wins can significantly enhance self-confidence. It’s about giving yourself credit where it’s due, which fuels further creativity. 

Keeping a record of your achievements, like a creative portfolio or a journal, and regularly reviewing it can help reinforce a positive mindset and boost self-esteem. 

Whenever you complete a project or receive positive feedback, add it to the list. Reviewing your accomplishments when doubt creeps in is a tangible reminder of your capabilities and successes, providing an instant confidence booster. It’s the perfect way to end nagging imposter syndrome.

8. Set creative goals that involve taking risks

Purposefully setting goals that challenge your creative limits can inspire growth. It’s about aiming for objectives that are a stretch but still attainable.

Here’s how to put it into practice: Define clear, measurable goals with an element of risk. For example, if you’re a writer, commit to submitting an article to a prestigious magazine or writing in a genre outside your comfort zone. 

And if you’re a photographer, set out to assemble your work into a published photo book. It doesn’t have to be something you sell, but a project you can commit to that pushes the creative boundaries in your craft.

As you work towards these targets, even partial successes are progress because they require pushing past usual boundaries. By merely getting started, you’ll have built momentum to break through preconceived limitations and comfort zones.

9. Seek feedback and support

Engaging with your community can provide new perspectives and encouragement. Collaboration and input from others are invaluable for growth.

“There is simply no better way to jump-start your creativity than to collaborate,” according to thought leadership strategist Melissa Cohen. “You can join a community, a group, or a project that involves collaboration, feedback, or co-creation. You can also seek mentors, coaches, or peers who can challenge you, support you, or inspire you.”

Try joining a group or finding a mentor in your creative field of interest. Present your ideas and be open to feedback. Also, offer your insights on their projects. This exchange can inspire fresh angles you hadn’t considered and reinforce the collaborative nature of creativity.

10. Try improvisation exercises

Improvisation is all about instinctual response rather than calculated moves. It’s a potent practice for thinking on your feet creatively.

Here’s how: Engage in improvisational activities related to your field. If you’re a writer, try stream-of-consciousness writing. If you’re an artist, draw with continuous lines without lifting the pencil.  

Also, infuse flexibility into your routine by designating times for free exploration without specific goals. This scheduled spontaneity creates opportunities for serendipitous discovery and reinforces an atmosphere where taking chances is not just accepted but expected.

These exercises encourage intuitive decision-making rather than relying solely on logic-based planning, which can be powerful in learning to be more creative. 

11. Overcome perfectionism with acceptance

Perfection can be an enemy of creativity. Accept that imperfections are inevitable and valuable as part of the creative journey.

If you’re a perfectionist by nature, consider your perfectionism’s impact on your productivity and well-being and recognize the opportunity cost or toll it’s taking. Assess whether striving for perfection in every detail is a productive use of your time and energy.

Here’s a practical exercise worth trying: Set a timer for your creative sessions, and don’t stop to revise or edit your work until it goes off. When the timer expires, stop where you are and share your imperfect work with peers or mentors. 

This exercise helps you get comfortable showing works-in-progress and understand that they’re just steps along the way, not final destinations.

12. Develop comfort with uncertainty

The creative process can be messy, and embracing uncertainty and chaos is necessary to unlock creative potential. It involves being willing to take risks without knowing the outcome and being open to the possibility of growth and transformation.

Uncertainty and ambiguity are essential principles in design and permanent parts of innovation. So, tolerating them is crucial for leveraging them as a source of inspiration and creativity.

Try this exercise: Start a small project without a clear end goal. Let it evolve organically, making decisions based on what feels right in the moment. This practice not only builds comfort with ambiguity but also encourages instinctive creativity.

13. Take bold creative leaps

Diving into the unknown can lead to innovation. But don’t overthink, just leap.

Take inspiration from artist and creative entrepreneur Jenna Rainey, who states you must “push your creative boundaries and challenge your own assumptions.” Experimenting with new ideas, styles, or approaches and venturing beyond the familiar can lead to unique insights and a richer understanding of your capabilities.

Identify one project or idea that feels exciting yet intimidating and commit to it publicly. This could be through social media or a professional network. Making your intentions known adds a layer of accountability that might push you to follow through.

14. Establish a supportive creative environment

Your environment can significantly influence your willingness to take creative risks. Cultivating a space that resonates with encouragement and openness is key.

Assemble a creative board of friends or colleagues who champion bold ideas. Regularly meet to share concepts and provide constructive feedback. 

Make your day-to-day environment more conducive to creativity, too. Personalize your physical workspace with items symbolizing courage, like artwork by artists you admire or mementos from past projects that pushed your boundaries.

15. Embrace continuous evolution

Accepting that your creative process will perpetually evolve prevents stagnation and promotes lifelong learning. Making art is all about appreciating each phase of growth.

Try keeping an evolution diary or journal where you record what you create and how your methods and ideas change over time. This content can include new inspirations, shifts in perspective, or even different emotional responses to the act of creating itself.

Go deeper by setting aside regular intervals—perhaps at the end of each project or quarterly—for self-assessment sessions. Reflect on recent work and ask yourself questions like “How have my creative challenges shifted?” or “What risks have I taken recently?” 

These reflections help solidify the understanding that creativity isn’t static. It’s an ever-unfolding adventure with twists and turns that should be embraced rather than feared.

Exercise flexibility as a creative risk-taker

In the dance of creativity, mindset takes the lead in embracing risk. Shifting from a place where fear dictates your steps to one where growth choreographs your moves can be transformative. This change in outlook empowers us to approach creative risks as opportunities rather than threats.

Self-reflection and self-awareness are pivotal tools in this transition. They help us map out our current creative confines and light the path beyond them, urging us to step up and leap forward into new territories with confidence.

Remember, creativity isn’t confined within the walls of art studios or writers’ desks. It’s a universal language spoken across all walks of life. By applying these principles broadly, we reveal infinite possibilities for innovation and personal fulfillment as naturally creative beings.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform designed for creatives, by creatives. Offering a complete arsenal of professional bookmaking tools, Blurb enables you to push your creative boundaries and create, print, and sell premium-quality photo books, magazines, novels, and more. By providing these tools and resources, Blurb aims to empower you to share your work and produce professional quality books with complete creative control. Sign up to get started.

The post How to take creative risks and get comfortable doing it appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The reality is creativity ebbs and flows. It’s not a fixed trait but a skill that you can hone. The pursuit of how to be more creative hinges on our mindset, environment, and how we approach creativity as a process.

Like Sir Ken Robinson, thought leaders in this space advocate that creativity is more than just having original ideas. It’s a process of bringing something valuable into existence. This process-oriented view suggests that creativity is competence one practices through problem-solving, critical thinking, and the ability to view things from different perspectives.

With this in mind, let’s explore how to become more creative and experiment with various ways to boost your creativity.

Habits and mindset for boosting creativity

Creativity isn’t just about having sudden sparks of genius. It’s a lifestyle you can cultivate with the right habits and mindset. Here are several key habits and mindsets that contribute to boosting creativity.

1. Embrace curiosity and wonder

Curiosity is like rocket fuel for creativity. We light up our creative spark by asking questions, seeking out new experiences, and looking at things from unique angles. Curiosity leads to exploration and experimentation, which are essential for creative breakthroughs. Cultivating a habit of asking “What if?” or “Why not?” can lead us down roads less traveled to discover innovative ideas and fresh perspectives.

So, how do you embrace curiosity and wonder? It’s essential to incorporate specific practices into your daily life. For starters, set aside time for daydreaming, allowing your mind to wander freely and explore new ideas without constraints. While it may seem counterproductive, research shows that daydreaming can help you better engage with meaningful long-term pursuits, significantly boosting creativity.

Along the same lines, one technique worth trying is to embark on “silent walks,” leaving your phone behind and simply following where your feet and thoughts take you. 

Engaging in a new medium or hobby you’ve never tried before can also ignite your creativity. Whether picking up a musical instrument, trying your hand at painting, or experimenting with a new cooking recipe, these activities stimulate your brain and inspire fresh perspectives.

2. Maintain a growth mindset

Psychologist Carol Dweck introduced this concept. It’s about growing our abilities and intelligence with hard work and persistence. This thinking pushes us to take risks, bounce back when things get tough, and keep learning—making it vital to boosting creativity.

Based on Dweck’s principles, several practical ways to develop a growth mindset exist. They’re easier said than done, but remember, it’s about developing a mindset, not a checklist of to-do’s.

• Recognize fixed mindset traps: Acknowledge the existence of a “fixed mindset” and become aware of how it manifests itself. Intentionally shift your perspective when faced with challenges or setbacks.
• Embrace challenges: See challenges as opportunities for learning and growth. Embrace the chance to develop new skills and knowledge.
• Don’t fear failure: View failure as a learning experience and an opportunity to improve. Embrace lessons that come from setbacks.
• Value effort and persistence: Understand the importance of sustained effort and perseverance in achieving goals. You can hone your intelligence and ability through dedication and hard work.

It’s also helpful to seek feedback as a tool for growth and improvement and understand that imperfection is a part of the learning process and growth.

3. Keep a creativity journal

Have you ever had an idea flash through your mind, only to disappear moments later? Keeping a journal handy helps catch those fleeting thoughts. It’s also great for doodling or jotting down random musings without fear of judgment because who knows what connections might emerge.

In addition to capturing creative ideas and reflecting on your creative process, journaling provides a space to declutter thoughts, silence the inner critic, and listen to one’s voice, hopes, and needs, thereby maximizing creativity. It’s no secret why great minds like Albert Einstein, Frida Kahlo, Mark Twain, and Leonardo da Vinci used journaling as a conduit to enhance their creativity.

4. Practice mindfulness meditation

Mindfulness meditation is a proven practice that increases focus and clarity, crucial elements in being more creative. Research suggests that regular practice can help clear mental clutter, which lets inspiration shine through, making it easier to access creative states.

But, there are a lot of techniques, and research suggests that certain types of meditation can be beneficial for stimulating creativity. 

Open-monitoring meditation is one powerful technique that involves observing and noting phenomena in the present moment and keeping attention flexible and unrestricted. It can be as simple as closing your eyes and letting thoughts pass through the mind. Open-monitoring meditation effectively stimulates divergent thinking, a key driver of creativity.

Mindfulness meditation also enhances creativity and innovation, with only 10 to 12 minutes being enough to experience benefits. While you can do it by sitting quietly, relaxing your mind and body, and listening to your breath, you can also incorporate mindfulness into your daily life by being more intentional and aware of your actions.

5. Seek inspiration from diverse sources

Creativity thrives on diversity. Soaking up different cultures or art forms or engaging with people outside your usual circle provides new perspectives that could trigger a richer pool of ideas and inspiration.

Immerse yourself in experiences you might not typically pursue, like attending cultural events or festivals outside your comfort zone and exposing yourself to new traditions and ideas. Visit niche museums or galleries dedicated to art forms you’re less familiar with, where you can explore unique and thought-provoking exhibits. Expand your reading list to include books from authors of different nationalities or backgrounds, offering fresh perspectives and insights. 

Make an effort to engage with people from diverse backgrounds and professions through networking events, workshops, or online communities. By diversifying your sources of inspiration and embracing novel forms of stimulus, you’ll fuel your creative reservoir with a broader spectrum of ideas and perspectives.

Fostering creativity through your surrounding environment

The spaces we hang out in tremendously impact our creative capacity. Let’s dive into how to tweak your environment to make it a hotbed for creativity.

6. Design an inspiring workspace

You don’t need a fancy studio to spark inspiration! A cozy corner decked out with comfy furniture and colors that tickle your senses can do the trick, too. What matters is creating a space where ideas feel welcomed and loved.

7. Clean up your physical space

Have you ever heard the saying “messy room, messy mind”? Clearing up clutter not only makes your workspace look good but also helps streamline thoughts. Plus, knowing where everything is saves time (and sanity).

8. Fill your surroundings with artistic vibes

There’s nothing like being surrounded by art or objects that stoke creativity, be it paintings, poems, or photo books. They serve as visual prompts for new ideas and keep motivation levels high.

9. Switch things up regularly

Often, familiarity breeds boredom, so shake things up now and then! Rearrange your workspace or try working from different places like cafes or parks occasionally, as they offer fresh stimuli that might just lead to remarkable new concepts.

10. Take nature walks to boost inspiration

Mother Nature is incredibly inspiring when you immerse yourself in it. Regular walks outdoors clear mental cobwebs and fuel creativity thanks to all those sensory experiences waiting outside our doorsteps.

A study by Stanford researchers found that walking boosts creative inspiration, with creative output increasing by an average of 60 percent. Further research shows that exposure to nature is associated with lower stress, better mood, improved attention, increased empathy and cooperation, and a reduced risk of mental health problems. 

11. Immerse yourself in cultural activities

Stepping outside the familiar often sparks innovation. Museums, galleries, and cultural events are perfect platforms for this. Exploring diverse perspectives through these mediums offers food for thought beyond normal boundaries. Making minor adjustments to your routines and activities can significantly impact your creative thinking and receptivity to great ideas.

Creative practices to expand your horizons

Fostering creativity is all about stepping out of your comfort zone and stimulating your imagination. Here are some activities to help unlock new artistic avenues.

12. Dive into new hobbies

Do you have a musical instrument collecting dust? Or maybe you’ve always wanted to try pottery? New hobbies bring fresh perceptions and experiences, which can be fantastic fodder for creative inspiration.

13. Try different artistic mediums

If you’re an artist or writer, don’t box yourself into one creative outlet. Painters might love the world of digital art. Writers could find joy in poetry or scriptwriting. Experimenting with different styles helps grow your skills and uncover new ways to express yourself.

Feel free to step outside your creative comfort zone and try an entirely foreign artistic medium. If you’re a writer, consider trying your hand at illustration or visual arts, even if you think you’re not particularly skilled. If you’re photography, try writing creative descriptions of the shots you take. While it might not come naturally, allowing yourself to be “bad” at something new can be surprisingly liberating. It frees you from the constraints of perfectionism and opens up the possibility of unconventional thinking. 

14. Hone your brainstorming skills

Techniques like mind mapping (more on this below) or SCAMPER are great tools for enhancing creative thinking. They push us to look at things from various angles, exercising our creative problem-solving skills 

SCAMPER is an acronym that stands for Substitute, Combine, Adapt, Modify, Put to another use, Eliminate, and Reverse. Each letter in the acronym represents a different approach to exploring new concepts during brainstorming. It’s a powerful tool for enhancing creative thinking because it encourages you to approach problems and ideas from multiple angles. 

For instance, you might ‘substitute’ one element of your project with something entirely different or ‘reverse’ the usual order of things to generate fresh insights. These techniques open the door to innovative solutions and help break through creative blocks. Hello, innovative solutions!

15. Team up with other creatives

Collaborating with other creatives can ignite a wildfire of ideas! Working together brings diverse viewpoints into the mix, resulting in more unique creations. Finding like-minded individuals can be as simple as joining creative communities and forums online, attending local art or writing workshops, or participating in networking events and conferences related to your field. 

Once you’ve connected with fellow creatives, consider hosting collaborative brainstorming sessions or working on joint projects. For writers, this could mean co-authoring a story or organizing a writing group. Visual artists might engage in collaborative exhibitions or art-sharing initiatives. Teaming up with other creatives helps you tap into a wealth of diverse perspectives, which can supercharge your creative endeavors.

16. Attend workshops and classes

Workshops offer structured environments where learning happens through doing—plus, they’re awesome places to meet fellow creators and expand your network. On a local level, explore community centers, art galleries, or libraries, which often host workshops on a range of creative topics. Many universities and colleges also offer continuing education courses that cater to creative pursuits.

Additionally, check out online platforms like Meetup, Eventbrite, or even social media groups related to your creative interests to find events and classes in your area. Reputable online courses and platforms like Coursera, Udemy, or Skillshare provide a wide array of classes and workshops focused on specific creative disciplines. These structured environments enhance your skills and provide excellent networking opportunities to connect with fellow creators.

17. Join creative challenges or contests

Creativity often flourishes in the face of challenges and limitations. Participating in challenges forces us outside our usual parameters, leading to unexpected yet amazing results.

There are numerous platforms and organizations that regularly host such events. Visual artists can explore challenges like Inktober, where artists create ink drawings throughout October. If you’re interested in photography, consider joining the 365 Project, where you take a photo every day for a year. For writers, check out opportunities like the Writer’s Digest Short Story Competition and the Inkitt Novel Writing Contest.

These challenges provide structured guidelines and deadlines, pushing you to think outside your comfort zone and generate innovative ideas. You can find many more creative challenges and contests by browsing online communities, forums, or social media groups dedicated to your creative niche.

18. Seek regular feedback

Receiving regular feedback from peers, mentors, or colleagues is vital to any creative journey. Constructive criticism and insights from others can provide valuable perspectives that help you grow and refine your work. Just don’t take feedback personally. Instead, view setbacks and creative missteps as opportunities to learn and improve.

In the same vein, learning to embrace failure as a natural part of the creative process, understanding that it’s a stepping stone toward success. By actively seeking feedback and learning from your triumphs and challenges, you’ll continuously evolve and become more resilient in the face of creative risks.

Mind and brain exercises to sharpen your creative thinking

Think of your brain as a muscle— the more you exercise it, the stronger and more creative it becomes. Let’s dive into some workouts for that creativity muscle.

19. Play puzzles and brain-training games

Who said training can’t be fun? Crosswords, Sudoku, and logic puzzles are great ways to flex those cognitive muscles while having an enjoyable time in the process. Regular puzzle-solving keeps your mind sharp and primed for creative thinking.

20. Engage in mindful observation

While a seemingly simple practice, mindful observation can enhance your creative thinking. All it takes is a few minutes each day to carefully observe your surroundings or a simple object. Pay attention to the details you might usually overlook. Notice the textures, colors, and shapes. By training your mind to be present and observant, you’ll develop a keen eye for detail and find inspiration in the ordinary, which can be a wellspring of creativity.

21. Practice lateral thinking

Lateral thinking is all about approaching problems from fresh angles. Try challenging yourself with exercises like finding multiple solutions to a problem or reversing assumptions. But lateral thinking isn’t just about problem-solving. It’s a powerful tool for enhancing creativity in your artistic practice. Consider these creative applications.

• Explore multiple angles: Try depicting your subject from various perspectives when creating art. Paint it from above, below, or through a character’s eyes. This approach can yield unique compositions.
• Reverse assumptions: In writing, flip assumptions about characters or plots. Make the hero the villain or change expected endings. This adds fresh and surprising elements.
• Generate diverse solutions: When stuck, brainstorm multiple problem-solving ideas. In design, consider unconventional approaches. Lateral thinking encourages innovative ideas and experimentation in your creative process.

By incorporating lateral thinking into your creative practice, you’ll explore new horizons, question assumptions, and embrace fresh ideas that can elevate your work to new heights. Who knows what innovative answers might come out?

22. Try free-writing exercises

Have you ever tried writing without worrying about grammar or making sense? It sounds strange, but this kind of free writing bulldozes mental blocks, allowing an unfiltered flow of ideas. Here’s a practical approach to try.

• Set a timer: Dedicate a specific amount of time, such as 10-15 minutes, for your free-writing session. Setting a timer creates a sense of urgency and keeps you focused.
• Go analog: Opt for pen and paper rather than a computer. This tactile experience can help you stay in the flow without the distractions of editing.
• Don’t stop or go back: The key to free writing is to keep your pen moving or your fingers typing without pausing to correct grammar or punctuation. Write whatever comes to mind, even if it doesn’t make sense.
• Embrace chaos: Allow your thoughts to flow freely, even if they seem disjointed or nonsensical. It’s in this chaos that unexpected and creative ideas often emerge.

By incorporating these practices into your free-writing sessions, you can tap into a wellspring of unfiltered ideas that may evolve into meaningful projects.

23. Use mind mapping to organize ideas

Mind maps visually structure thoughts, helping to make connections between unrelated concepts. These templates are perfect for brainstorming sessions when you need many creative ideas fast!

Mind mapping involves creating a visual representation of your thoughts and ideas. You begin with a central concept or theme, often represented by a central image or word, and then branch out nonlinearly with related concepts, keywords, or phrases. It’s a flexible and dynamic way to capture and explore ideas.

Let’s say you’re working on a project for a new children’s book. Start with the central idea (say The Fearless Voyagers) at the center of your page. From there, branch out with major plot points, character development, setting descriptions, and themes or motifs. This way, you can easily visualize the structure of your novel and pinpoint areas that need more development.

Here’s another example. Imagine you’re brainstorming ideas for a new marketing campaign. You create a mind map with the campaign itself at the center. Branches extend to target audience, channels, and messaging. Under channels, you can further branch into social media, email, and search engines. Each can then branch into specific tactics or ideas, creating a visual representation of your campaign strategy. Further branching can help you break down each category into manageable tasks.

24. Try the Six Thinking Hats technique

The Six Thinking Hats, developed by Edward de Bono, is a technique for looking at decisions from multiple perspectives. Each hat represents a different direction of thinking (emotions, facts, creativity, and more). Let’s look at two of these hats to understand how they work.

• The White Hat (facts and information): With the white hat, focus on gathering objective data and facts related to the issue. Ask questions like, “What are the key facts?” This hat helps you make decisions based on concrete information, such as researching the target audience for a new coffee table book.
• The Red Hat (emotions and intuition): Switch to the red hat to explore your emotional response to the decision or problem. Ask, “How does this feel?” This hat encourages you to consider your instincts and emotions, such as assessing how the audience is likely to react to your photography.

Using these hats, you can approach challenges from different angles, leading to more creative ideas and well-rounded solutions. 

Techniques for creative professionals

Staying creative and productive is a must for us creatives. Here are some strategies to keep the idea mill churning.

25. Team brainstorming sessions

Brainstorming with your team can serve up a volley of ideas. Remember, no ideas are too wild. This collaborative vibe often leads to unexpected but brilliant solutions. Here are a few effective brainstorming techniques to try out next time you meet with your team.

• Brainwriting: Each person writes down three ideas related to the topic and then passes them to the person next to them, who builds upon them. 
• Rapid ideation: Quickly generate a large number of ideas in a short amount of time without discussion or analysis.
• Starbursting: Focus the discussion on a relevant problem or goal and have everyone jot down questions about it.

These techniques can help unlock creativity, encourage team participation, generate many ideas, and benefit brainstorming sessions.

26. Try design thinking principles

Design thinking focuses on empathy, ideation, and experimentation. This approach helps understand user needs better while brainstorming out-of-the-box solutions, leading to innovative designs that hit the mark. To get started, follow these key steps.

• Empathize: Begin by deeply understanding your users’ or audience’s needs and perspectives. Conduct interviews, surveys, or observations to gather insights into their experiences and pain points.
• Define: Define the specific problem you aim to address based on the insights gained during the empathy phase. Clearly articulate the challenge you’re trying to solve.
• Ideate: Engage in brainstorming sessions to generate a wide range of creative ideas without judgment. Encourage wild, out-of-the-box thinking to explore various solutions.
• Prototype: Create prototypes or mockups of your ideas to test and refine them. This step allows for experimentation and helps visualize potential solutions.
• Test: Gather feedback by testing your prototypes with users. Iterate your designs based on their input, refining your ideas until you reach an innovative solution that effectively meets user needs.

For more in-depth information and resources on design thinking principles, you can explore platforms like the Stanford d.school’s Design Thinking Bootleg or IDEO’s Design Thinking for Educators.

27. Get creative with random word generation

When facing a creative challenge, try this simple yet effective technique: randomly select a word from a source like a dictionary or an online word generator. Then, brainstorm ways to link that word to your problem or idea generation. 

For example, if your creative issue is developing a new advertising campaign, randomly selecting the word “hotdog” may lead you to consider concepts like pastimes, comforts, and conspicuous behaviors, which can spark innovative campaign ideas. While indeed very random, this unusual method helps break away from conventional thought patterns and encourages fresh and unexpected connections between seemingly unrelated concepts. 

28. Take yourself on an “artist’s date” 

Inspired by The Artist’s Way, set aside regular time for solo excursions or activities that fuel your creativity. Explore art galleries, visit a botanical garden, take a scenic hike, or simply wander through a new neighborhood. These “artist’s dates” can help you reconnect with your creative essence, discover new sources of inspiration, and break through creative blocks.

29. Cleanse your creative mind with a digital detox

In today’s hyper-connected world, it’s easy to become overwhelmed by the constant influx of information. Consider unplugging for a day or weekend. This digital detox can clear your mind and allow space for new ideas to flourish. 

Use this time to reconnect with the physical world, engage in outdoor activities, or practice mindfulness. You’ll be surprised at how rejuvenated and creatively charged you can feel after a digital break.

30. Experiment with contrasting styles and extremes

Go far beyond conventional boundaries by blending contrasting styles, techniques, or disciplines that seem entirely incompatible. For instance, create a fusion of classical and digital art or weave together polar opposite genres, like comedy and horror, in your writing. These unlikely combinations can lead to truly unique creations.

You can also experiment with extreme time constraints in your creative work. Set short, intense deadlines to force rapid idea generation or embark on long-term projects that evolve and develop over an extended period, allowing ideas to mature and transform gradually.

Play with the capabilities of artificial intelligence and non-human collaborators to inject unpredictability into your creative projects. Explore AI-generated art, music, or writing, or collaborate with technology-driven tools like machine learning algorithms. For instance, the multi-modal AI tools from Runway generate mindblowing outcomes worth dabbling in.

Leveraging technology to evoke creativity

Creativity meets technology, opening a world of exciting possibilities for artists, designers, and writers. Explore how tech can add that extra zing to your creative projects.

31. Learn a new tool

While many creators already have their go-to digital tools, mastering new ones can elevate your work and help you learn new skills. In addition to the tools you’re familiar with, consider exploring these:

• Adobe Creative Suite: A powerful set of design tools consisting of Photoshop, Illustrator, and InDesign.
• Scrivener: This comprehensive platform helps writers organize and write projects efficiently.
• Blender: A versatile open-source software tool for 3D modeling, animation, and rendering.
• Hemingway Editor: Clarify and clean up complex sentences, common errors, and readability in your writing.
• BookWright: A free and user-friendly tool simplifying the book layout and design process.

Learning and integrating new tools in your creativity arsenal can sharpen your skill set and unlock fresh creative possibilities.

32. Try AI-powered assistants

AI is changing the way we create. From generating ideas to busting writer’s block, think of it as having an assistant always ready with suggestions. Here are a handful of AI platforms worth trying out.

• DALL-E: This AI model generates images from text descriptions. Creatives can use it to spawn images and graphics based on their unique ideas and concepts.
• Plotagon: This tool uses AI to transform scripts into animated videos. It’s powerful for creators looking to turn their stories into visually engaging content.
• Miro AI: Automatically generate mind maps and seamlessly transform your ideas into diagrams or clusters of information.
• Fontjoy: Generate unique font combinations and mix and match different fonts for the perfect pairings.
• Jasper: An AI platform that offers generative text and visual art tools, enabling you to create stunning supporting imagery and content with just a few lines of text.

Remember, though, AI is here not to replace but to enhance your creativity. 

33. Social media as your muse

Platforms like Instagram or Pinterest are brimming with inspiration. Plus, online communities offer feedback, support, and even collaboration opportunities. So go ahead and explore groups on Facebook or search your interests on TikTok. Think of it as creative exploration, not just time wasted.

34. Start a blog or podcast

Creating a blog or podcast can be a creative project in itself. These mediums offer the opportunity to delve into topics you’re passionate about, interview other creatives, and build a community around your interests.

35. Learn to code for interactive projects

Learning to code can open new creative possibilities. Not only can skills in web development, app development, or even game design allow for the creation of new projects, but coding can add a new dimension to your existing creative work, such as creating a photography portfolio website, an interactive interior design experience, or simply marketing your work online.

36. Explore VR and AR as new canvases

Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR) technologies are pushing the boundaries of how we experience and interact with art. They offer immersive environments where you can create and explore in three dimensions. For artists and designers, this means a whole new canvas for experimentation. It can provide writers with new ways to tell stories and engage audiences.

To explore VR and AR as a creator, start by researching these technologies and get suitable hardware for exploration. This could be as simple as a tablet, gaming computer, or laptop, or as elaborate as VR headsets, AR glasses, or motion controllers. 

Depending on your hardware and aspirations, you can choose from different development platforms like Unity or Apple’s ARKit. Start with small projects to build your skills. If things start to blossom, you can take your VR/AR interests further by engaging with online communities for support, collaborating with more experienced creators, and staying current with the latest advancements.

Prompts and practices for cultivating daily creative habits

Integrating daily practices and challenges is essential to foster continuous growth and innovation in any creative field. Here are some exercises and prompts that’ll push creative boundaries and keep your creative juices flowing.

37. Take on 30-day creative challenges

How about creating something new every day for a month? Photographers could try snapping unique photos daily, while designers might whip up logos in various styles.  Here are a few examples based on different creative disciplines.

• National Novel Writing Month (NaNoWriMo): A challenge for writers to pen a complete novel in November. But who says you can’t create your version any time of the year?
• The 30-Day Photo Challenge: This challenge provides a variety of daily photography tasks, including self-portrait, rule of thirds, black & white, texture, high angle, low angle, and architecture, aiming to boost creativity and skills.
• 30-Day Reel Challenge: Specifically for Instagram, this challenge focuses on creating daily video reels using prompts to help creators explore and utilize Instagram’s reel feature.

With these challenges, it’s not about building an impressive portfolio but about stepping outside your comfort zone by forcing yourself to create something, even if it’s far from perfect.

38. Add downtime to your day

Incorporate moments of downtime into your daily routine. Think of it as taking creative breaks to let your mind wander freely without specific goals or distractions. 

Set aside short intervals, even as few as 10 minutes, throughout your day to disconnect from screens and distractions, find a comfortable space, and simply relax. Allow your thoughts to flow without any specific agenda. This practice provides mental space for creative ideas to emerge naturally, leading to unexpected bursts of inspiration.

39. Capture your dreams each morning

Begin your day by capturing your dreams in a dedicated dream journal. Keep this journal by your bedside, along with a pen or pencil. As soon as you wake up, take a few moments to reflect on your dream. You may not remember every detail at first, but you may be surprised by how well your dream recall improves over time.

Jot down sketches, descriptions, or any vivid details you remember. Don’t worry about grammar or coherence. The goal is to record your meaningful details while they’re still fresh after waking up. This daily practice can transform your dreams into tangible creative material, providing a unique source of subconscious inspiration for your creative projects.

40. Set aside ‘curiosity time’

Dedicate a specific time each day to indulge your curiosity and explore new topics. Choose a subject or theme that piques your interest, whether a historical event, a scientific concept, or a cultural phenomenon. 

Set aside 20 minutes to an hour for curiosity research. Utilize books, online resources, documentaries, or podcasts to delve into particular topics that interest you. Take notes, jot down questions, and immerse yourself in the learning. Regularly engaging in this intellectual exploration will expand your knowledge base and uncover fascinating ideas for your creative work.

41. Create with soundscapes

Transform the ambient sounds of your daily life into a creative resource. Throughout the day, use a portable recording device or an app like FieldScaper or AudioShare to capture snippets of ambient noise from your surroundings. Collect sounds from various settings, such as nature, urban environments, or your workplace. 

When working on creative projects, incorporate these sounds to enhance the auditory experience. Blend them into your compositions, audio narratives, or multimedia works to infuse your creations with a sense of place and authenticity. Or just listen back to your recordings while writing, painting, or doing what you do creatively.

42. Commute differently for fresh perspectives

Break the monotony of your daily commute by embracing different routes or modes of transportation. Instead of following your usual path, opt for alternative routes that expose you to new environments, scenery, and perspectives. Experiment with walking, cycling, or public transportation. 

During your commute, pay close attention to the sights, sounds, and details you encounter. Allow this change in routine to refresh your perspective and stimulate your creative thinking. Over time, you’ll gain fresh insights from your daily commutes, which can inspire new ideas for your creative projects.

43. Engage in sensory experiences daily

Hone your creative senses by engaging in sensory experiences daily. Explore different sensory activities like blindfolded taste tests, tactile exploration of textures and materials, or listening to music with closed eyes. 

For a taste test, blindfold yourself and sample various foods, paying close attention to flavors and textures. Or test the waters with tactile exploration, focusing on the sensations of different surfaces or objects. Listening to music with your eyes closed is another simple way to allow yourself to become fully immersed in the auditory experience. 

These practices heighten your sensory awareness, enabling you to tap into different parts of your brain deeply. In turn, you can draw creative inspiration from your heightened senses.

Last word: becoming more creative and making it stick

Boosting your creativity isn’t about waiting for inspiration to strike. It’s about cultivating habits that encourage fresh ideas and innovative thinking. It’s about embracing the new, the unfamiliar, and sometimes, the uncomfortable. 

As you venture through your creative endeavors, remember that each step, each challenge, is an opportunity to expand your horizons and enrich your craft. Stay curious, stay open, and let your creativity unfold uniquely and beautifully.

***

At Blurb, we are all about turning creativity into reality! Our self-publishing platform is tailored for artists and innovators like you who want to convert imaginative ideas into beautiful books. With a range of customizable features, high-quality printing, and easy-to-use bookmaking tools, Blurb lets you craft books, journals, notebooks, and magazines that are not only visually impressive but also deeply reflective of your personal style. Begin your book journey with us today.

The post How to be more creative: 43 ways to boost originality appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Bullet journaling is a versatile practice that melds creativity with productivity, offering a customizable space to record, reflect, and organize our thoughts. It’s a blank canvas for your creative personality and an easy way to keep yourself accountable and on the right track.

A bullet journal provides limitless utility, from organizing your thoughts and decluttering your mind to planning your to-do’s and setting your intentions. Here, we explore the essentials of this handy tool and how to start a bullet journal for your own pursuits.

What is a bullet journal?

As the name implies, a bullet journal is a medium for personal organization that uses bullet points and symbols to log information in a single notebook. It provides a framework to become more organized and productive while also serving as a creative outlet.

Originally developed by designer Ryder Carroll and first shared with the world in 2013, the name “bullet journal” comes from using abbreviated bullet points. But it also derives from using dot journals and gridded pages using dots rather than typical notebook lines.

A bullet journal is simple and task-focused. All you need to get started is a blank notebook and a pen. You can use it to organize reminders, plan to-do lists, and brainstorm ideas. It can also serve as a mindfulness tool for meditation as well as an artistic conduit to channel your creative flair.

Inherent to bullet journaling is flexibility—offering plenty of room to customize your journal with daily, weekly, monthly, or future collections. If the format you use one week doesn’t land, try a different spread for next week. Simple in structure, bullet journaling provides you with the framework, and you fill in the rest.

How to make a bullet journal: a starter’s guide

Starting a bullet journal is an exciting venture, allowing you to exercise your left and right brain in a uniquely personalized way. Follow these steps to create a bullet journal that aligns with your intentions, preferences, and style.

1. Choose your journal

The first step in creating your bullet journal is selecting the perfect notebook. This is a personal choice that should resonate with your intended use. First, consider the size: Do you want something small and portable or a larger canvas? Also, pay attention to paper quality, especially if you plan to use pens or markers that may bleed through.

The type of pages is also a critical factor. Consider what style best suits your planned activities. Dotted pages offer a subtle guide for writing and drawing; lined pages might suit those who prioritize writing, while blank pages provide the freedom of a blank canvas. 

Selecting a journal is like picking the right canvas for your art or the perfect camera setting to capture the shot. As a creative, think about what fine details matter, like a paper that suits your medium, be it ink, pencil, or even light watercolor. Consider whether you prefer a journal that lays flat with dotted grids for precision or blank pages for free-form expression. This is the foundation of your creative journey.

If commercially available bullet journals don’t resonate with you, no worries. You can create your own. Consider designing your personalized bullet journal and using print-on-demand services to bring it to life. 

Psst. With Blurb, you can customize a journal with your own prompts, illustrations, charts, and quotes. Then print as many copies as you need with various sizes and cover options. Learn how to make a journal using BookWright.

2. Decide on its purpose

What do you want to achieve with your bullet journal? Is it for tracking daily tasks, fostering creativity, or increasing productivity? Defining the purpose of your journal will help guide its structure and content.

If it’s for productivity, you might include more planning and task-oriented spreads. If it’s for mindfulness and reflection, pages for gratitude logging, mood tracking, or journaling might be more prevalent. For creative expression, leave space for sketches, doodles, and brainstorming.

Your bullet journal can be more than just an organizer. It can be a storyboard for your projects, a sketchbook for your ideas, or a diary of your artistic journey. Define its role in your creative process—whether it’s to track progress, brainstorm ideas, or collect inspiration.

Your journal’s purpose may evolve, but a clear starting point will keep it organized and focused.

3. Gather your supplies

Once you determine the purpose of your bullet journal and know what you want to do with it, it’s time to gather your tools. Arm yourself with various pens, markers, and rulers for precise lines and colorful accents. You can also use embellishments like stickers and washi tape to add a fun and personalized touch.

Making a bullet journal with hardcopy materials is one way to do it, but it’s not the only way. Using digital tools is an effective alternative, especially if illustrating is not your jam or crafting tends to leave behind a messy trail. 

Instead, use programs like Adobe Illustrator, Canva, and BookWright to create your spreads before printing them into a book. This method allows for endless creativity and precision and aligns your bullet journal with your vision while maintaining professional-grade quality.

In the digital assembly of your bullet journal, consider the visual elements that will shine once printed. Utilize different textures, fonts, and graphics that reflect your creative style. When chosen thoughtfully, these elements will transform your printed bullet journal into a tactile masterpiece that captures your artistic essence.

4. Set up your key

The “key” is the backbone of your bullet journal, providing a quick reference to understand your entries at a glance. Ryder Carroll used these designations in his original bullet journal, but you can adopt your own versions to suit your journal’s style and needs.

• (task)
X (task completed)
> (task migrated)
< (task scheduled)
⚬ (event)
– (note)
* (priority)
! (inspiration)

Beyond the basics, consider adding symbols that align with your personal or professional needs—perhaps different icons for various types of meetings or creative sessions. Consider what types of entries you’ll make most frequently and how a key can make the journaling process smoother. 

Your key is more than just a list of symbols. It’s a shorthand for your creative process. Design symbols representing different stages of your projects, mood indicators for creative brainstorming sessions, or icons for different types of inspiration. This personalizes your journal and streamlines your workflow.

5. Create your index

Think of your index as a dynamic table of contents. At the very beginning, save the first four to six pages of your bullet journal for the index. Here, you’ll write the page numbers of your entries as you track them so you can find them again quickly.

With space allocated to your index, number the remaining journal pages. As you add content, you can promptly log it in the index with the corresponding page number. This might seem tedious initially, but it will pay off in the long run by making navigation quick and effortless. 

When creating your bullet journal, adding page numbers and utilizing templates for a Table of Contents (TOC) can enhance its functionality. Many bookmaking software options offer these features for ease of organization. For example, with Blurb’s BookWright tool, you can easily number your pages and use templates to design a user-friendly TOC, making navigation through your journal more intuitive and efficient.

Envision the index like a map of your creative workflow. As you outline the structure of your journal, think about categorizing pages by project, inspiration, or type of artwork. This way, your index becomes a quick reference guide to your evolving portfolio of ideas and creations.

6. Set up your future log

Your future log is your planning powerhouse. Divide it by month, and under each section, list significant dates, deadlines, and events. Don’t forget to leave some space for goal setting or jotting down ideas and future projects you’d like to tackle. This log keeps you organized, helps balance your workload, and ensures that creative projects get the time they deserve.

Your future log can be a visual timeline for project deadlines, exhibitions, or personal milestones. Use color coding or different layouts to represent various aspects of your life and work. This section can be a bird’s-eye view of your creative journey through the year or for a specific project.

7. Design your monthly spread

When setting up your monthly spread, start with a calendar to have a clear overview of the month. Next to it, include a to-do list for your most important tasks. Add a habit tracker to monitor daily practices or a mood tracker if mindfulness is a focus. 

This space is great for a creativity corner, perhaps a small section for daily doodles or lines of poetry. The aim is to have everything you need for the month in one spread, so customize it to fit your unique rhythm and routine.

Your artistic skills will shine here. Design a monthly spread that reflects your style—minimalist, abstract, detailed illustrations, or a collage of ideas. Think of this spread as a canvas for monthly inspirations and themes, not just a planner.

8. Plan your weekly or daily spreads

Choosing a weekly or daily layout depends on your task volume and detail preferences. Weekly spreads provide a broader view that lets you plan days in advance, while daily spreads allow for extensive detail for tasks and notes. 

Whichever you choose, ensure space for spontaneity—leave blank areas for sketches, random thoughts, or inspirational quotes. Remember, you can craft your bullet journal to be as much about creativity as it is about organization.

These spreads can be a playground for experimentation. Mix up layouts, try different artistic techniques, or use these pages to sketch small daily drawings. Each week or day can uniquely represent your current mood or project.

9. Add collections

Collections are where your bullet journal becomes an inventory of your personal and professional life. These include lists, trackers, planning pages, or brainstorming spaces dedicated to specific projects or themes. 

As a creative, you might have collections for project ideas, color palettes, favorite quotes, or books to read. Think about what will fuel your creativity and support your goals, then dedicate pages in your journal to these themes. Over time, these collections become a rich archive of your journey, ideas, and projects.

10. Make it your own

A bullet journal is your creative playground, where organizational and artistic boundaries are blurred. Add a personal touch with doodles, stickers, washi tape, or other embellishments that spark joy and inspiration. Consider using thematic colors for different sections or incorporating your own sketches and artwork. 

Keep in mind that this journal is an extension of you. Make it a space that reflects your personality and creative spirit and, most importantly, a space you look forward to engaging with every day.

This is where you infuse your personality into every page. Whether it’s through thematic illustrations, personalized color schemes, or creative headers and footers, let each page reflect your unique artistic voice.

11. Review and reflect

At the end of each month, take a moment to step back and assess your bullet journal journey. Reflect on the layouts and systems that have been most effective and those that might need tweaking. Ask yourself what accomplishments you’re most proud of and what lessons you’ve learned. 

Use this reflection as a tool for continuous improvement, adapting your bullet journal to better suit your evolving needs and goals. This practice not only ensures that your bullet journal remains an effective tool but also fosters a habit of mindfulness and self-awareness.

Reflection is vital in the creative process. Use your bullet journal to reflect on your progress, appreciate your achievements, and learn from challenges. This section can include visual reflections, sketches of progress, or notes on evolving styles and techniques.

12. Making and selling your bullet journal

Creating and selling your concept is always possible if you’re looking to take your project to the next level. Utilizing a self-publishing platform makes it easy to print your bullet journal into a physical product and distribute it through various channels. Indie print-on-demand platforms allow you to print multiple copies of your journal while creating a potential revenue stream. 

When making a journal to sell, ensure the design is universal and can cater to a wide audience. Include explanations or guides on using the journal effectively, and consider branding your book to uniquely position it against comparable products on the market. Selling your bullet journal can be a rewarding way to share your creative process with others while tapping into a potentially fruitful revenue stream.

For the creative entrepreneur, your bullet journal can be a prototype for a product line. Document your design process, brainstorm marketing ideas, or track customer feedback. This section becomes a roadmap for turning your creative passion into a viable product.

Bullet journal ideas worth exploring

There is no shortage of practical ideas for bullet journals. To help get your creative juices flowing, explore some of these possibilities.

• Daily log: Create a list of tasks you need to get done, scheduled events, and notes you want to record.
• Creative goals tracker: Set your artistic or creative goals and monitor progress toward achieving them.
• Publishing timeline: Outline and track critical dates and milestones for your publishing projects.
• Photoshoot planner: Organize and plan the details of upcoming shoots.
• Creative inspiration log: Document sources of inspiration, ideas, and creative sparks.
• Gallery submissions tracker: Keep a log of your artwork submissions to galleries, including dates and responses.
• Color palette page: Design pages dedicated to color palettes for various projects or inspirations.
• Client details: Keep track of client information, project details, and communications.
• Character profiles: Develop and track detailed profiles for characters in your writing or other creative projects.
• Exposure settings log: Record exposure settings for different photography sessions for future reference.
• Monthly memories: Create a page to record memories from the month, such as photos, quotes, or highlights.
• Brain dump: Write down all your thoughts and ideas to clear your mind.
• Gratitude journal: As a powerful tool for mindfulness training, take a moment to jot down things you are grateful for each day.
• Habit journal: Keep track of habits you want to establish or break.
• Mood tracker: Record your mood daily to help you identify patterns and triggers.
• Reading log: Keep track of books you have read or want to read.
• Travel record: Record your travel experiences, including places you’ve been, or create a list of places you wish to see.
• Spring cleaning list: Create a list of cleaning tasks and decluttering projects to tackle.

These ideas only scratch the surface of possibilities when starting your bullet journal. Let your creativity lead the way as you dive into the world of bullet journaling. Explore more custom journal ideas to find inspiration, and when you’re ready, bring your unique vision to fruition. Remember, your bullet journal is not just an organizer; it’s a conduit for your creativity and a chronicle of your artistic journey.

***

Blurb offers a seamless solution if you’re looking to transform your bullet journal ideas into a tangible concept. We specialize in bookstore-quality, print-on-demand books, ideal for artists and creatives like you to materialize your ideas. With custom journal options, professional-grade printing, and user-friendly tools, Blurb empowers you to create bullet journals that are functional, visually stunning, and deeply personal. Start your project today.

The post How to start a bullet journal: a guide for creative minds appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Here, we set the record straight on what defines a low-content book and how it can be a meaningful, profitable endeavor for savvy creators willing to think outside the box. 

What is a low-content book?

Have you ever picked up a diary, coloring book, or notebook with prompts or graphics? These are typical examples of low-content books. 

Simply put, a low-content book is a type of book that has a low word count compared to a typical novel or textbook. Instead, these books provide space for users to fill in their own content or generate their own creations, like drawings, patterns, or written responses. 

Low-content books are like blank canvases, awaiting your personal touch. They’re generally repetitive and intended to be populated by the user, whether it involves journal entries, record keeping, figuring out puzzles, or coloring in shapes.

Types of low-content books worth exploring

Despite the minimalist nature of this book type, low-content books are a rising trend in the publishing industry, continuously evolving with new types and formats. Low-content book themes in higher demand focus on areas of gratitude, mindfulness, and self-care. Other types of low-content books include:

• Coloring books: These have illustrations ready for you to bring to life with colors. Not limited to children’s books, they come in themes ranging from animals and nature to intricate patterns to favorite movie and book characters.
• Journals: Unlike standard notebooks, journals might have prompts, questions, or themes that guide you in writing or reflecting on your day, dreams, or feelings. 
• Planners and agendas: These help organize your time, tasks, and activities. They might include calendars, to-do lists, and sections for goals or notes.

• Activity books: These can include puzzles, mazes, word searches, dot-to-dots, and other fun activities.
• Notebooks with dotted or gridded pages: Popularized by the “bullet journal” trend, these notebooks offer a structure that helps create lists, charts, and even custom layouts.
• Sketchbooks: While they may look like regular notebooks, sketchbooks contain specific types of paper ideal for drawing and sketching.
• Logbooks: These journals help you track certain activities. Examples include workout logs, food diaries, and bird-watching logs.
• Prompt books: These provide a specific prompt or question on each page, sparking creativity or reflection. For example, a prompt might ask, “What made you smile today?” or “Sketch the view from your window.”
• Guest books: Commonly found at events, weddings, and places of accommodation, these books allow guests to leave notes, signatures, and messages.
• Recipe books: Blank recipe books allow you to fill in your favorite recipes, creating a personalized collection of culinary adventures.

Given this vast spectrum, there’s no denying the creative possibilities to produce low-content books that offer value and purpose for specific uses and audiences.

Benefits of low-content books

Venturing into the world of low-content books can be fulfilling and lucrative. Let’s dive into the benefits for creators interested in exploring this category:

• Easy to produce: Unlike novels or textbooks that require extensive research and editing, the simpler design and layouts of low-content books make the production process quicker and less complex.
• Niche opportunities: The world of low-content books is vast, allowing creators to cater to specific niches. From horticultural planners designed for avid gardeners to coloring books for vintage car enthusiasts, the possibilities are endless.
• Passive income: Once you’ve designed and published a low-content book, it can continue to generate income without much additional effort on your part.
• Flexibility: Creating low-content books allows for a flexible schedule. Without the pressure of meeting story development or intensive research deadlines, you can work at your own pace and tweak as you see fit.
• Creative outlet: For those with a creative streak (particularly photographers, illustrators, and graphic designers), a low-content book is like a blank canvas. Photographers, for instance, can create themed journals featuring their work, while illustrators can showcase their art in coloring books.
• High demand: With the rise of self-care and mindfulness trends, many people seek tools to help them reflect, organize, or simply relax. Low-content books like journals, planners, and coloring books fit the bill perfectly.
• Personal growth: Beyond the commercial aspect, designing such books can inspire personal growth. It nudges creators to think about what users might need, want, or find therapeutic—encouraging empathy and understanding.

Low-content books present a wide-ranging opportunity for creators to merge their passions with a viable income source, all while offering value to their audience.

How to create a low-content book

Embarking on the journey of creating a low-content book is both exciting and rewarding. Before you get started, consider several fundamental ideas and steps:

1. Define your audience

It’s essential to clearly understand who your book is for. Are you targeting young children, busy professionals, or self-actualization enthusiasts? Clearly defining your target demographic can help guide your book’s design, content, and marketing strategy. Take a page from this guided journal for mothers, an effectively targeted low-content book tailored for a specific audience.

2. Find your niche

In the expansive world of low-content books, finding a specific niche can help your book stand out. Your niche can also shape your book’s profitability. But don’t limit your niche to what’s most profitable—go with what you’re passionate about.

3. Quality over quantity

While it might be tempting to churn out multiple books quickly, it’s essential to prioritize quality. A well-organized and mindfully crafted book will resonate more with your audience and earn you a better reputation in the long run. Creating multiple low-content books at the expense of quality will only tarnish your efforts and slow your momentum.

4. Write and design with purpose

Every page in your low-content book should serve a purpose. Whether it’s a journal prompt or a coloring book design, make sure it aligns with your book’s overall theme and provides value to the user.

5. Choose the right tools

A plethora of tools are available for book design, from Adobe InDesign for professional layouts to free bookmaking platforms like Blurb’s BookWright. Familiarize yourself with the tools you have at your disposal and choose one that best fits your needs and skill level.

6. Formatting is key

Ensure your book is formatted correctly, especially if you want to print and sell your book. This includes considering things like design layouts, margins, page numbers, and using high-resolution images.

7. Gather feedback

Before you finalize and publish your low-content book, gather feedback. Share your book with friends, family, or potential target audience members. Their insights can help you refine your product and address any overlooked issues.

8. Marketing and distribution

Once your book is ready, think about how you’ll get it into the hands of your audience. Platforms like Blurb’s can be great for self-publishing but you may also wish to consider other distribution methods or local bookstores.

9. Continuous learning

The first book you create might not be a bestselling masterpiece, and that’s to be expected! Every book is a learning opportunity. Consider customer feedback, learn from reviews, and continuously refine your process.

With these steps in mind, you’ll be well on your way to creating a low-content book that resonates with others and brings you success.

Selling low-content books

Successfully selling your low-content book means blending creativity and business savvy. Here’s a comprehensive guide to help you navigate this journey effectively:

1. Plan your marketing strategy

A well-thought-out book marketing strategy is the backbone of any successful book sale. Identify your book’s target readership and tailor your promotional efforts to appeal directly to them. Analyze where your audience spends most of their time online and how they typically discover new books. The channels you choose—social media, online bookstores, or email marketing—should align with these findings.

2. Leverage online platforms

There are many channels to explore when selling a self-published book. Ours at Blurb is more than just a creation tool. While it facilitates the design and printing process, it also offers an online bookstore where you can set and adjust your prices, allowing you to control profit margins while reaching a global audience.

3. Engage in active promotion

Once you’ve figured out where to sell your book, determine how to get people there. Most low-content book creators use a combination of the following.

• Social media: Visual platforms like Instagram and Pinterest are perfect for low-content books. Regular posts showcasing your book’s inner designs or interacting with potential readers can generate interest and drive sales.
• Personal website or blog: Create a dedicated website or blog for your book(s). This provides a central hub where readers can learn more, access sample pages, and make purchases directly or be directed to online retailers. Leverage SEO to attract organic traffic, whether to your website or Amazon product listings.
• Email marketing: Start a newsletter to update subscribers on new releases, special promotions, or behind-the-scenes content. Offering a free page or two from your low-content book as a download can incentivize sign-ups.
• Reviews: Collaborate with niche bloggers or influencers. Their recommendations can bring credibility and visibility to your work, reaching audiences you might not have reached on your own.

4. Explore local opportunities

Getting your foot in the door at local bookstores is a great starting place for promoting your book. And participating in local events gives you a direct connection to potential readers. Whether it’s a craft fair, a book show, or a community market, these venues allow you to personally introduce your book, explain its uniqueness, and even garner immediate sales.

5. Price your book right

Your product, its placement, and positioning strategy are all essential elements of your marketing mix. But don’t forget about your book’s price. The cost of your book should align with the value it provides. Low-content books generally sell for between 4 and 12 dollars. The more sophisticated and comprehensive the book, the higher the price.

To encourage more sales, consider promotional pricing at launch or bundling different books together for a special rate. Such incentives not only attract attention but can also lead to higher volume sales.

Real-world examples of low-content books published via Blurb

Many authors and creators have explored the world of low-content books and chose Blurb to bring them to life. Here are a few notable examples.

The Cosmic Dream Journal

This journal invites users to record and reflect upon their dreams, set against an inspiring cosmic backdrop to facilitate a deeper exploration of their subconscious mind.

The Unicorn Coloring Book

Bursting with magical illustrations, this coloring book offers enthusiasts a chance to dive into a fantasy world of unicorns, allowing them to add color and bring these mystical creatures to life.

Things I Did Well – Internalize

Designed to bolster self-confidence and positive reinforcement, this journal provides a dedicated space for individuals to acknowledge and celebrate their daily accomplishments and personal growth.

Feelings: A Mood Journal

Acting as an emotional barometer, this journal encourages users to track and articulate their daily moods and emotions, promoting self-awareness and emotional well-being.

Reawaken Planner

More than just a daily organizer, the Reawaken Planner is a guide for personal growth and mindfulness, helping users schedule tasks, set intentions, and reflect on their journey.

Each book serves as a tool for self-discovery, creativity, or organization—catering to different needs while offering interactive experiences.

How Blurb can help

Blurb is a self-publishing platform for every stage of your book’s journey. We’re a complete solution that supports creators from the initial design phase to sales, distribution, and feedback collection. 

Thanks to intuitive design tools, Blurb simplifies the self-publishing process, ensuring every book meets bookstore-quality standards. Once printed, you can leverage Blurb’s versatile selling options, setting your prices and tapping into a global market via Amazon or the Blurb Bookstore.

There’s incredible potential to tap into the world of low-content books. Sign up to get started with Blurb.

The post What are low-content books? And how do you create and sell one? appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Fortunately, today, there are plentiful resources to help you learn everything you need to know to turn your ideas into a tangible, printed book. So, if you’re eager to create colorful worlds that ignite young imaginations through illustrating children’s books, this how-to guide is tailored for you. Let’s start with the basics.

Seek inspiration

It can be daunting at first if you’re entering the realm of illustrating a children’s book with little experience in this genre. But fear not. Start by seeking inspiration from successful illustrators and authors in this genre.

Immerse yourself in popular children’s books. Examine how visuals are employed to narrate a tale. Explore different styles and techniques used by various illustrators. This will help you understand different approaches and how visual storytelling works in children’s literature.

• Art galleries: Visit galleries that exhibit work from renowned illustrators or specialize in children’s artwork. It’s like a crash course in creativity.
• Social media platforms: Follow established illustrators on Instagram or Pinterest. Take a sneak peek into their creative process and let it ignite your imagination.
• Illustration books: Explore books that showcase artworks from multiple artists across diverse genres, including children’s literature. It’s a treasure trove of artistry.

Inspiration isn’t limited to other people’s work. It can come from anywhere—nature walks, everyday objects, dreams, and imagination. Stay open-minded as you embark on this creative voyage.

Research your genre and audience

Creating an illustrated children’s book is more than just drawing cute characters. You need to be aware of your desired demographic’s interests and outlooks, remembering that children’s literature can vary depending on age. 

Kids’ books span different age groups, each with unique needs and preferences, so be mindful of who you’re trying to reach.

• Age-appropriate content: Pictures tell the story for infants and toddlers before age 5. So, keep illustrations simple yet captivating to hold their attention. For older kids and complex narratives, you’ll need more detailed art. Try adding subtle elements like metaphors or symbolism to your artwork.
• Diverse characters: Children’s literature is all about embracing diverse characters and themes. Create inclusive visuals that reflect the society in which we live. 
• Cultural sensitivity: It’s often best to tell stories from our own experiences. But our individual experience can’t speak for our entire culture or identity group. Make sure you depict each character and culture respectfully and authentically. Research cultural symbols or consult experts to avoid misrepresentation.
• Mindset: To illustrate effectively for children, step into their shoes. What would fascinate them visually? What colors would attract them? Keep these considerations in mind to resonate better with young readers.

Remember, illustrating a children’s book isn’t just about showcasing artistic skills. It’s about communicating ideas clearly so even young minds can understand easily.

Collaborate with your author

Collaboration is critical if you’re an illustrator but not a writer. Understanding and executing the author’s vision—or vice versa—can be challenging but effective. Here are some tips for successful author-illustrator collaboration.

• Clear communication: Talk it out. Make sure you understand what the author or publisher wants from your illustrations. Don’t hesitate to inquire.
• Regular updates: Keep in touch. Share your progress and get feedback on your drafts.
• Flexibility: Be open-minded. Remember, it’s about working together to bring each other’s vision to life.

Eric Carle and Bill Martin Jr.’s work on “Brown Bear, Brown Bear, What Do You See?” is an excellent example of successful collaboration over four decades. Martin wrote the book in an incredible half-hour and reached out to Carle to illustrate it after seeing his work in an ad. Their effective communication led to one of the most beloved children’s books ever published, selling millions of copies over their life-long friendship.

Choose your art style

After immersing yourself in the world of children’s literature and understanding your audience, it’s time to choose your art style. This is an essential step as it will set the tone for your book and help communicate your story effectively.

Begin with popular styles

During your research, you’ve probably already come across the classic styles most often used in children’s literature. But, just in case, here’s a list of the top styles that you can consider before starting to illustrate.

• Watercolor: Watercolor is a popular medium for children’s books due to its soft and dreamy quality. It’s great for creating atmospheric backgrounds and delicate details. Examples include Beatrix Potter’s Peter Rabbit series.
• Cartoons or comics: This style often features bold lines and vibrant colors, with exaggerated features to depict characters. It’s perfect for humorous or action-packed stories. Dav Pilkey’s Captain Underpants is a classic example.
• Cut-outs or collages: This style involves cutting out pieces of paper, fabric, or other materials and arranging them to create images. Eric Carle’s The Very Hungry Caterpillar is a famous example of this style.
• Digital art: With advancements in technology, many illustrators are now using digital tools to create their artwork. Digital art can mimic many traditional styles, like watercolor, oil painting, and more, but with the added benefit of easy editing and manipulation.
• Pencil or line drawings: These are simple, yet effective, especially when paired with a good story. They can be black and white or paired with a splash of color for emphasis. An example would be E.H. Shepard’s illustrations in Winnie the Pooh.
• Mixed media: This style combines different mediums, like ink, paint, and collage, to create rich, layered illustrations. A good example would be Lauren Child’s Charlie and Lola books.

Find your voice

With some examples in mind, it’s time to figure out what will work best for you—and the story. Here are a few things to keep in mind while narrowing down your style.

• Identify your strengths. Start by identifying what you’re naturally good at. Are you adept at creating whimsical watercolor sceneries, or do your strengths lie in digital art? Maybe you excel at simple line drawings or intricate patterns? Identifying your strong suit will make the process more enjoyable and the final product more polished.
• Match your style to the story. Next, consider the story you’re illustrating. A humorous tale might call for exaggerated, cartoonish characters, while a serious or educational book might benefit from more realistic illustrations. The art style should enhance the narrative and make it more engaging.
• Consider your age group. Remember, different age groups respond to different styles. Younger children might prefer bold, bright colors and simple shapes, while older kids may appreciate more detail and complexity.
• Experiment and refine. Don’t be afraid to experiment with different styles until you find one that feels right. Sketch, doodle, paint, and play around with different mediums. You might discover a style you never knew you had!
• Stay consistent. Once you’ve chosen a style, consistency is key. Make sure your illustrations maintain a uniform look and feel throughout the book. This helps create a cohesive visual experience for the reader.

Remember, there’s no “one size fits all” in choosing an art style. It’s about finding what works best for you and the story you’re telling.

Pick your color and mood

Choosing the right colors and style for your children’s book is like picking the perfect outfit—it can make a big impression. Color sets the mood and engages young readers, so choose wisely.

Basic color theory is your secret weapon. Warm colors like reds and yellows bring the energy, while cool blues and greens create a calming vibe.

• Bold or pastel colors: Bold colors grab attention, perfect for action scenes. Pastels create a softer look, great for bedtime stories.
• Saturated or desaturated: Saturated colors are bright and intense, perfect for lively scenes. Desaturated shades give a vintage feel or a more subtle tone.

Your illustration style matters, too. Realistic drawings bring depth, while abstract illustrations leave room for imagination.

• Detailed illustrations: Meticulous planning creates intricate pages. Techniques like pen and ink or watercolors can help.
• Simplified artwork: Minimal lines and shapes focus on characters’ expressions. Perfect for highlighting actions and emotions.

Remember these applicable clichés: Less is more. Consistency is key, so don’t confuse young readers with sudden shifts. Keep it fun and engaging.

Develop characters and setting the stage

The essence of a children’s book lies in the characters and their environment. When illustrating, invest time creating inspiring characters and vibrant settings that resonate with the storyline.

Create captivating characters

Your character design should be as unique as their personalities. Experiment with different shapes, sizes, and colors until you find what best represents your character’s vibe. Your characters’ personalities ultimately tell the story and provide lessons for children, so it’s one of the most critical components to get right. 

Design vibrant settings

The setting immerses young readers into your story. Whether it’s an enchanted forest or a bustling cityscape, fill each scene with details that bring the environment to life. Use color schemes to set mood and atmosphere: bright hues for joy, darker tones for mystery or danger.

Keep it cohesive

A consistent visual style throughout your book maintains continuity and enhances reader engagement. This means maintaining consistency in both character designs and settings.

• Character consistency: If your main character has blue eyes on page one, those eyes need to stay blue unless there’s a plot reason for a change. Keep track of these details with your characters—maybe create a “character sheet” for reference to list specific traits to help you keep track.
• Setting consistency: If there’s a tree outside the protagonist’s house at the beginning, include it every time we see their home again. This is a simple example of how small details make a big difference in illustrating cohesive and consistent children’s books. 

Your illustrations offer more than just supplementary decorations. They’re the primary medium that tells the story visually.

Sketch and storyboard

The first step in bringing your children’s book to life is sketching initial concepts. Unleash your creative power and let the ideas pour forth. Don’t worry about perfection at this stage; these sketches are just a starting point.

A handy tool for illustrators during this phase is a simple sketchbook. It’s like a playground for your ideas, where you can experiment and explore different possibilities without any limits. Plus, it’s screen-free and eco-friendly.

Build a storyboard

Once you have some preliminary sketches, it’s time to start storyboarding. Think of it as creating a visual roadmap for your book. It’s like GPS for your illustrations, guiding you through each scene and ensuring a smooth journey for your readers.

Instead of words, you’ll be using images to tell your story: a silent movie but with pictures.

Tips for effective storyboarding

• Keep it simple: Stick figures and basic shapes are your best friends. There’s no need for fancy illustrations, yet—simplicity is key.
• Show action: Use lines and arrows to show movement. Your illustrations should be so clear that readers can understand what’s happening without text.
• Maintain consistency: Keep your character designs consistent throughout the book unless there’s a deliberate change in the storyline. We don’t want any identity crises.

Following these steps gives you a clear vision of your project before diving into the more complex stages. A little planning goes a long way, so don’t overlook storyboarding as a navigation tool to guide the process.

Draft thumbnails and roughs

Once you have your characters, setting, and storyboard down pat, it’s time to really get into the creative process. Start creating thumbnail sketches and roughs of your illustrations. 

Sketch thumbnails

Thumbnails are small, black-and-white drawings that help you refine composition, expression, perspective, angles, and lighting. They also provide a great platform to experiment with different ideas before committing to a final image. When sketching your thumbnails, feel free to make as many as you need in order to find the right solution. 

It’s a good idea to sketch your thumbnails in sequence and as spreads, so you know exactly where page turns are and where you might want an illustration to span both pages.

Work on the roughs

When you are satisfied with your thumbnail sketches, it’s time for your roughs. These are uncolored sketches that build off your storyboard and thumbnails, but with more refinement. It’s a good idea to lay out your roughs in their intended page size, text, and with a light gray border, so you can easily see where the gutters will be.

Try to focus on expression and character poses as much as possible during this stage and make sure they are working together to tell the story. You also want to consider any elements that may need fixed perspective or require careful composition—these details should all be worked out now. This is where you can plan for page turns and decide where you want an illustration to span both pages. When everything looks good, it’s time to move on to the inks.

A final tip: keep your rough stages simple and loose. They don’t need to look like they are done—they just need to get your ideas across. 

Make a book dummy

A book dummy is a mockup of your book, and it’s a really important part of the process, especially if you’re collaborating with a writer. This physical representation of your book will help you better understand the flow, spacing, and pacing of your story.

We’d suggest you make your dummy the actual size of your final book. This will help you understand how the scale feels in little hands. Paging through your dummy will help you make sure that the pacing, sequencing, and page turns feel right. Plus, you can send it to your author, editor, art director, or even friends to get feedback and get aligned before you finalize your work.

It’s actually such an important part of the process, we have an entire guide to making a book dummy. 

Finalize your illustrations

Once you feel very good about your book dummy, it’s time to truly begin the illustration process. You have your blueprint, it’s time to add all the beautiful details that will bring your story to life. It’s important to remember that the illustrations need to be able to stand on their own—they should be complete and crisp enough for a viewer who may not be able to read the text.

Many illustrators take their roughs and block out color, starting with the darkest and moving to middle tones then the highlights. From those blocks of color, it’s time to add depth with gradients, masking, and light and shadow. Last up is the texture, to create a sense of reality.

Of course, your process may look different! Going from roughs to polished illustrations depends on your medium, tools, timeline, and style. Remember to enjoy the process.

Try digital tools

As an illustrator, getting acquainted with digital tools that can help enhance and execute your work can be very helpful. With that in mind, we’ll outline two digital tools that make the process smoother, and offer features that traditional mediums might lack.

Adobe Illustrator

Adobe Illustrator is a popular choice for children’s book illustrations. It offers vector-based graphics, meaning you can scale your illustrations without losing quality—perfect for print. With numerous brushes, effects, and color options, Adobe Illustrator lets you create detailed and vibrant images.

• Brushes: The software has various brush types like calligraphic, scatter, art, etc., each offering unique strokes and textures.
• Effects: From shadows to 3D objects or artistic filters—the possibilities are endless.
• Color options: You can access millions of colors and gradient options, allowing for depth in your illustrations.

Procreate

If you prefer working on a tablet device, Procreate, exclusive to iPad users, is an excellent choice. Procreate provides an intuitive interface paired with high-resolution canvases, making it ideal for detailed work. Its vast library of customizable brushes lets you add personal touches to your creations.

• Layers: This feature helps manage complex compositions by separating elements into different layers, which you can edit individually later if needed.
• Gestures: The app supports multi-touch gestures, giving artists more control over their canvas as they draw.

No matter what tool you choose, remember that practice makes perfect. Spend time exploring these applications’ capabilities before starting on the final artwork. Experimenting helps unlock new techniques while understanding how to best use them within the context of children’s book illustrations.

Gather feedback

Creating illustrations for a children’s book is like a dance—it takes sketching, coloring, and much refining. One of the most critical partners in this dance is feedback. Embrace it and use it to help your illustrations shine.

Communicate with collaborators

If you’re working with an author, editor, or another illustrator, communication is key. We’ve talked about it before, but it’s worth mentioning again. Communication can make or break a project, so be sure to stay in touch and continually bring your collaborators along as you are finalizing your illustrations.

Remember, not everyone provides feedback the way you like to receive it. Try to not take anything personally, and coach others on how you best respond to feedback. For example, you can ask the author to provide specific examples of how they want a certain scene reworked. Or, if you’re close to the end of a project, remind your team that you can only accept project-ending red flags, rather than nitpicking edits.

Seek feedback from colleagues 

If you’re working alone or just want peer-to-peer feedback from fellow illustrators, it’s a great idea to reach out to them directly. Join online communities like DeviantArt or local art groups to showcase your illustrations and get input from fellow creators. You can earn constructive feedback from multiple, potentially hundreds, of people on these platforms.

Hire an editor

While your author or peers can offer fantastic feedback, there’s nothing that can beat a paid editor. So consider hiring a professional editor who specializes in children’s literature. They can give you valuable insights into how your illustrations align with the story, characters, and target audience. Plus, they can make sure that any typos, inconsistencies, or print errors are caught before you start marketing your book!

Not all feedback needs to feel like a punch to the gut. Feedback is great, but don’t let it hurt your artistic soul. This project is yours, so stay true to your style.

Understand printing formats and specifications

As you’re planning to bring your children’s book illustrations to life, there are a lot of details to consider when formatting and eventually printing your book. Let’s whizz through some of the most common printing formats and specifications.

• Format: Choosing the perfect format for your book is like finding the right pair of shoes—it has to fit just right. From small square books for tiny hands to larger landscape books for shared reading, Blurb offers various book formats and size options to suit your needs.
• Paper quality: Don’t underestimate the power of paper. A glossy finish can make your illustrations pop, while a matte finish adds an elegant touch. With Blurb, you can choose from paper options like Premium Lustre, uncoated proline pearl photo, and more.
• Digital versus print color spaces: Color spaces can be tricky, but we’ve got your back. RGB for digital screens and CMYK for print production—it’s like speaking two different languages. Adobe Illustrator has detailed guides to help you manage these spaces effectively.
• Bleed settings and margins: Don’t let those white edges ruin your masterpiece. Use bleeds to extend your design beyond the trim area. Treat margins like bodyguards for your text and images, ensuring nothing gets cut off during binding or trimming.

Now that you have the knowledge to conquer the printing process, you can assemble and polish your illustrations for a flawless finished product.

Publish and market

Once you’ve finished illustrating and assembling your children’s book, it’s time to publish and market it. When publishing a children’s book, you can go traditional, which can be an uphill battle for most creators. Or you can take complete ownership of your book and self-publish it.

Traditional publishing houses

If you choose the traditional route, let the publisher handle the marketing and distribution. Just pray they accept you and find an agent to pitch your work. This option is a long shot for authors and illustrators without a track record in the industry.

Self-publishing

Self-publishing gives you complete control and ownership over your children’s book. Not only do you have to finance the project, but you also have to handle marketing and distribution. Platforms like Blurb take much of the guesswork out of the equation and make self-publishing a book easy.

Marketing approach

Marketing your self-published book requires a strategic vision that uses a combination of approaches. Here are a few to consider.

• Identify your target audience, including parents or gift givers, and tailor your marketing efforts to them.
• Write an enticing book blurb that inspires and excites readers to want more.
• Establish a presence online by creating a website, blog, social media, or a combination of these platforms to help spread the word about your book.
• If your book is listed on Amazon, encourage reviews by contacting friends, family, and influential bloggers in your genre.
• Host a launch event at your local bookstore or library to celebrate the release of your book.
• Donate copies of your book to schools, daycare centers, or libraries to help build awareness.
• Build an email list to keep your audience engaged and informed about your book.
• Use keywords and metadata to optimize your book’s listing or web content to show up across search engines better.

Not all of these marketing tips will apply to your children’s book, but mastering a few of these channels can help get your book known. Remember that marketing a self-published children’s book takes planning and effort, but it is essential to reach your target audience and ultimately sell your book.

Why use Blurb for children’s books

Blurb is a preferred platform for self-publishing children’s books because it offers a range of tools and resources to help authors and illustrators create, print, and sell their books, all while allowing them to maintain complete creative control over the final product.

Blurb offers free bookmaking and design tools that allow creators to easily drag and drop illustrations onto blank pages and use any of their fonts. Once published, Blurb allows creators to promote and sell their self-published book in various ways, including in the Blurb Bookstore, on Amazon, and with worldwide online retailers.

Get started today with Blurb!

The post How to illustrate a children’s book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Since you’re here, you know a children’s book’s layout is fundamental to its success. How the story unfolds on the pages, the arrangement of illustrations and text, and the overarching flow of the story all play a role in captivating the interest of young readers.

Here, we explore the art of effectively using children’s book templates, focusing on essential layout tips that will allow you to design visually stunning books. Learn the ropes of storyboarding, flow, and consistency to elevate your book’s creative appeal and narrative. 

What you need before getting started

Before creating a children’s book, you need a clear vision. Here’s what you need before diving into your children’s book design.

• Create compelling idea. Every great children’s book starts with a concept. It could be an otherworldly fantasy, a morale-building adventure, or an inspirational journey into a particular topic. No matter what, a benchmark requirement is an interesting idea that resonates with your target readers and ignites your passion for storytelling.
• Make a well-defined plan. Writing a children’s book requires careful planning. Outline the plot, characters, and overall structure of your book. Consider the age group you want to target, too. A systematic plan is a stable roadmap to keep you on track throughout designing and assembling your book.
• Understand your target audience. You must tailor your children’s books to a specific age group, as each has distinct preferences and cognitive abilities. Take time to understand the age group you’re writing for. This knowledge will help you maintain consistent language, themes, and design choices.
• Build engaging characters. Memorable characters are the heart of any successful children’s book. Develop characters that children can connect with and root for throughout the story. Give them thought-provoking personalities and relatable traits that resonate with young readers.
• Balance text and illustration. Children’s books often rely on a combination of copy and images to convey the story. Consider how much text you’ll use on each page and how it will interact with the visuals.
• Design quality illustrations. Captivating illustrations are paramount in children’s books. Whether you’re an illustrator or collaborating with one, the artwork should align with your vision and enhance the storytelling experience.
• Find a children’s book template. While some creators prefer starting from scratch, using a book template can significantly streamline the design process. Templates offer a blueprint for book design and layout structure, which can be immensely helpful in cohesively arranging your book’s content.

With these boxes checked, you’ve done most of the hard work toward designing your children’s book. The next phase is to assemble a storyboard and start organizing the components of your template and layout.

Creating a storyboard

A storyboard is a sequenced visual representation of your children’s book. It’s a roadmap that outlines the flow of the story and text and illustration placement on each page. Crafting a storyboard shapes a clear and organized structure to deliver your book’s narrative. 

How to create a storyboard

Storyboarding involves visually structuring a story’s sequence of events, settings, character development, and key plot points. By organizing the story into separate cells, you can focus on each narrative element and create a visual blueprint that helps keep everything flowing smoothly.

• Outline the plot. Break down your story into key scenes or chapters. Summarize the main events in each section, keeping in mind the pacing and progression of the narrative.
• Sketch the layout. Create rough sketches for each page, indicating illustration and text placement. Consider the visual flow and how the illustrations interact with the text to enhance the storytelling.
• Consider page turns. Pay special attention to the page turns. Use them to build anticipation and surprise the reader. Each page turn should naturally transition to the next part of the story.
• Review and revise. Once you’ve completed the initial storyboard, review it thoroughly. Request feedback and editing support to improve your narrative’s overall structure and coherence.

How the storyboard helps with templates and design

The storyboard becomes even more valuable when working with a children’s book template. It can help instruct the design modifications and customization of a template to match your specific ideas and content better. Here’s how the storyboard aligns with the template and aids the design process.

• Layout customization. The storyboard gives you a clear sense of each page’s layout. With this visual roadmap, you can easily adapt a template’s predefined elements to match your desired arrangement of text and illustrations.
• Hierarchy. A well-structured storyboard establishes the visual order of your book. It allows you to see prominent focal points and emphasize vital elements on each page, making it easier for young readers to follow the story.
• Consistency and cohesion. Creating a storyboard ensures a consistent design throughout the book. Cohesion in the book’s layout, typography, and illustration style is the basis for a polished and professional-looking children’s book.
• Efficiency in design. The storyboard provides a clear plan of action that minimizes guesswork by directing how each page will look, even before applying any template.

The storyboard is a powerful tool to help you visualize your ideas, identify any potential gaps or inconsistencies in the story, and seamlessly transition from page to page.

Crucial layout components of a children’s book

Many components must come together to create a cohesive children’s book layout. Each element plays a role in engaging young readers and immersing them in the story. Let’s dive into each so you can choose templates that work best for every part of your book.

1. Book cover

The book cover is the first thing children see, and it serves as a gateway into the magical world inside. The cover’s design should spark curiosity and intrigue, inviting children to pick up the book and explore further. 

Consider a template that will allow you to show off your most vibrant and eye-catching illustration, the one that reflects the essence of your story. And, while your visuals should be the most attention-grabbing, your title and author’s name should also be clear and legible in the template you choose. Remember to customize your layout using fonts matching the rest of your book. 

2. Front matter

Front matter typically includes the title page, copyright page, and dedication. Find a simple, uncluttered template with consistent fonts and design elements that align with the book’s theme. Front matter sets the stage for the story and establishes the book’s credibility, but it shouldn’t distract or disrupt the reading experience.

3. Scene breaks

Scene breaks signal transitions within the story. Novelists usually use visual icons and line breaks to indicate a shift in time or setting, a change in point of view, or skip over unimportant moments. 

A children’s book differs slightly from a novel, as every page or spread is a natural scene break! Look for a children’s book template that allows you to use single pages to capture a whole scene and entire spreads for key story scenes. 

4. Page spreads and page turns

As mentioned above, page spreads and turns are hugely important in your book design process. Spreads are two facing pages in a book, where illustrations and text interact cohesively across the fold. These are full-spread panoramic views of a scene well-suited for dramatic images and important story events. You’ve already chosen a template with both individual pages and spreads. Now it’s time to organize those page spread layouts mindfully by ensuring the visuals complement the text and add depth to the storytelling. 

Page turns are another structural element that can build suspense, reveal surprises, and enhance the pacing of a book. Strategically placed page turns create tension and anticipation, encouraging children to flip to the next page eagerly. You’ve probably built this tension into your storyboard, but as you move through the design process, keep these moments of pause in mind.

5. Trim size

As you look for the perfect template, consider the overall size of your book! This will affect how much information you can fit on a page and the overall design feel. Choose an age-appropriate trim size that feels comfortable for young hands to hold. 

Generally, large hardcover books make for great children’s books, as they enhance the view of illustrations and text while also making for easier page-turning. But smaller sizes can also work well for board books and early readers. Use a trim size that best accommodates the nature of your book’s content, audience, and reading experience.

6. Illustrations

Illustrations are the heart and soul of a children’s book. They provide a visual narrative that complements and enhances the written text and visual cues that help comprehension and relatability. 

While not built into children’s book templates, you’ll want to consider your imagery as you select the right one for your book. It will inform which templates are most appropriate as well as the book’s overall design. If you’re part of a bookmaking team, ensure you’re collaborating. Whether you’re the author or illustrator, if you’re working with another person, getting on the same page allows your book to be cohesive, visually appealing, and consistent.

7. Word count

Balancing word count in children’s books is essential to keep the story engaging and appropriate for your target age group, as different age groups have different word count expectations. A template that works for a chapter book for older children won’t work for youngsters—so carefully consider your word count as you choose your layouts.

For early readers (ages 5 to 8), aim for word counts between 1,000 and 2,500 words. For picture books, keep the word count to around 600 or less. Longer chapter books for children can range from 4,000 to 10,000 words. 

Of course, these are general ranges and depend on the specific genre, story, and audience. But as a general rule, remember that children’s books generally rely on concise and impactful storytelling. Focus on your story’s essential elements; every word should contribute to the narrative.

8. Font and typography

When it comes to typography best practices, choose easy-to-read fonts that are child-friendly and align with the book’s theme. While children’s book templates often have fonts baked in, you should be able to easily customize each layout to better fit your story.

As a rule, your font and typography should match your story’s mood and tone. Consider opting for a larger font size for younger readers and experimenting with different styles for emphasis or character dialogue. Again, this is an excellent place for author and illustrator collaboration if you’re working on a team. This will ensure the font works well with the illustrations.

9. Colors

Colors are a powerful tool in children’s book design, setting the tone and atmosphere of the story. Most templates you find will have a pre-selected color scheme, but don’t feel locked in. Personalize any template you work with to have it fit your narrative needs.

Consider using bright, cheerful colors for light-hearted tales and softer, muted hues for soothing narratives. A carefully chosen color palette can enhance the emotional impact of the illustrations and create an immersive reading experience.

10. Back matter

Back matter is another opportunity to be creative and provide added value to readers, be it activities, games, or additional information that complements the story. Again, this is where the book’s age group and reading level are relevant considerations. Keep back matter engaging and informative, encouraging further interaction with the book. And make sure you select a template that gives you the space and layout you need for all the content you’re planning!

Tips for a successful children’s book layout

We’ve given you a lot to think about above. But no matter which templates you choose or components you add to your book, there are a few best practices.

• Find a balance between text and illustrations to create an engaging reading experience. 
• Maintain a consistent layout throughout the book with the same margins, spacing, and alignment on each page to create a cohesive visual experience.
• Plan for page turns to create suspense, reveal surprises, and enhance storytelling. Use page spreads to create a dramatic effect or to add emphasis.
• Use theme-relevant fonts with clear and distinct letters to aid readability.
• Ensure a clear visual hierarchy to guide young readers through the story.
• Test the layout with children to gather feedback and make improvements.
• Embrace simplicity and avoid clutter in the design to keep the focus on the story.

By appropriately customizing each component of your children’s book template, you can create a stunning layout that captivates young readers, stimulates their imagination, and leaves a lasting impression. 

Find design inspiration in children’s books from other creators

These case studies demonstrate how effective layout choices can elevate children’s books, making them engaging, visually appealing, and memorable. 

The Birds in the Backyard

The Birds in the Backyard is a visually stunning children’s book that exemplifies the power of a well-designed layout. The template used in this book allows for the perfect balance between elaborate illustrations and informative text placement. The vibrant color scheme captures the attention of young readers, while the clear visual hierarchy guides them through the book. 

Amara’s Yoga Dreams

Amara’s Yoga Dreams is a beautiful example of how a simple layout supports the storytelling experience. The template’s larger font sizes and spacious page spreads allow young readers to immerse themselves in the enchanting world of yoga with Amara. The strategic placement of illustrations alongside the text illustrates the yoga poses, making the book interactive and easy to follow for children. 

Wyatt the Pirate

Wyatt the Pirate is an explorative example of customizing a children’s book template to create a captivating and adventurous story. The layout’s clever use of bold and playful fonts and imaginative illustrations bring the characters to life. The page spreads and scene breaks strategically build anticipation, encouraging young readers to explore the journey of this brave little pirate. 

Ten Happy Planets

Ten Happy Planets is a wonderful example of how a children’s book layout effectively and effortlessly communicates educational concepts. The template’s clean and flexible framework supports the content in a way that’s visually appealing and accessible. The bright colors and engaging illustrations capture the attention of young readers, making learning about the solar system an engaging experience.

The Dog Named Yes

The Dog Named Yes is a heartwarming example of how a children’s book can shine even with drawings made by kids. The simple and charming illustrations, created by the children themselves, add a unique and endearing touch to the book’s layout. The template’s simple, consistent text layout complements the childlike illustrations, leaving the focus on the illustrations that let young readers connect with the story on a personal level. 

Use a children’s book template and design tools from Blurb

Blurb is a print-on-demand company that empowers self-publishers to bring their books to life—and sell them! Our user-friendly bookmaking tools and children’s book templates simplify the design process. From there, we offer everything you need to sell and distribute your book.

Blurb is a proven solution for countless children’s book authors. To see examples, visit our bookstore to find hundreds of children’s books online. You’ll find books for babies, toddlers, and kids, all produced by self-publishers like you from around the world.

Get started on your children’s book project with us today!

The post Design that captivates: A creator’s guide to children’s book template layouts appeared first on Blurb Blog.

This comprehensive guide explains how to make a coffee table book that stands out in quality and content. You’ll learn about different types of coffee table books you can create, from photo-driven volumes to more storytelling narratives, along with the steps to conceptualize your book and bring it to life.

What is a coffee table book?

Imagine you’re having friends over, and you want to spark interesting discussions or just give them something visually pleasing to look at while they sip their coffee. That’s where a coffee table book comes in. Coffee table books are usually oversized and hardcover, filled with beautiful images and engaging content, and intended for prominent display. 

Coffee table books cover a wide range of topics, from travelogs and food inspiration to cultural eras and fashion design. They’re not meant to be read like a storybook from start to finish but rather savored in tiny portions. Think of them as visual snacks for the eyes or conversation starters, designed to be picked up, flipped through, and enjoyed at leisure. 

For creative professionals, publishing and selling a coffee table book can be one of the most lucrative options in the bookmaking world. Aspiring designers and artists can also utilize this format to share their art and publish their work in a tangible form, helping them reach a wider audience and establish a name in the industry.

Lastly, coffee table books can also be perfect memory keepers and family heirlooms, capturing important moments or documenting the past via scrapbook or journal. The creative possibilities are limitless.

Types of coffee table books you can make

Coffee table books come in all genres about topics as general or niche as you can imagine. It can be helpful not even to think of them as books—they’re conversation starters, sources of inspiration, and artistic statements. Here are some ideas to spark your creativity.

• Photography books: Transform your travel photos or striking local shots into an engaging snapshot of a journey or travel guide.
• Cookbooks and food books: Combine tantalizing recipes and culinary traditions to create a delectable coffee table book.
• Cookbooks and food books: Turn your DIY projects or gardening tips into visually compelling how-to guides that are informative and eye-catching.
• Musical themes: Express your passion for music with a book featuring concert snapshots, musician bios, or album artwork histories.
• Design inspiration: Fashion enthusiasts, interior designers, and artists: Leverage this format to display your work or the work that inspires you.
• Historical and cultural eras: Use the coffee table book format to capture critical historical events or explore iconic cultural influences.
• Fine art collections: Enhance your living room aesthetic with a curated collection of fine art pieces, complete with insightful explanations.

The secret is to pick a topic close to your heart. Crafting these unique pieces has no hard and fast rules, so let your imagination take the lead. Below you will find steps to make your coffee table book.

1. Conceptualize your coffee table book

When you set out to create a coffee table book, the first and arguably most important step is conceptualization. Conceptualizing your coffee table book involves defining its purpose, identifying your target audience, visualizing its design, and determining its content.

Define your purpose

Start by asking yourself: “What do I want this book to achieve?” Your coffee table book could serve lots of purposes. It might be an artistic expression, a collection of your favorite travel photos, or a showcase of a specific theme or subject matter. Perhaps it’s a way to share a personal story or to promote a brand or a cause. Defining the purpose of your book will not only guide your content creation but also influence the design and layout decisions you’ll make later on.

Identify your target audience

If you are planning to sell your book or distribute it to anyone but yourself, you need to think about the person who will hold it at the end. Your target audience will influence your books’ content, design, and marketing strategies. 

• Identify their interests: What topics would appeal to your audience? Are they interested in art, fashion, travel, photography, or a particular hobby or subject matter? The theme of your book should align with the interests of your audience.
• Consider their aesthetic: Your audience’s design preference can significantly impact the style and content of your book. A book targeting Y2K-loving millennial dog owners might have a different tone and visual style than one aimed at Victorian homeowners.
• Think about their lifestyle: Is your book for casual readers who casually flip through it over coffee or for collectors who will pore over every detail? Understanding this can help determine how in-depth your content needs to be.
• Evaluate their budget: High-quality coffee table books can be quite pricey. Ensure the production cost and the resulting price point of your book matches the spending capacity of your target audience.

Visualize your design

Next, think about how you want your book to look and feel. Your coffee table book should represent you and your target audience, so consider blending the two. What kind of aesthetic do you want to create? Elegant and minimalistic, or vibrant and eclectic? 

Consider the color scheme, layout, and type of imagery you want to use. Are you more into black-and-white photography, or do you love bold, colorful illustrations? You don’t have to get into all the details, but having an overall vision will help you as you begin curating and designing your book. Remember, your book should tell a story through its visuals, so this isn’t the step to skimp on.

Now visualize your book’s format, size, paper quality, and cover design. These aspects contribute to the overall aesthetic appeal of your book and should align with the purpose of your book. For instance, if your book is about minimalist architecture, you might opt for a clean, sleek design with lots of white space.

Determine the content

Finally, decide what content to include in your book. Most coffee table books are visually oriented, so high-quality photographs will likely form the bulk of your content. However, you might include other elements like illustrations, infographics, maps, or text. If you include text, consider how it will complement the images. It could provide context, tell a story, or offer insights related to the visuals.

Remember, the best coffee table books don’t just look good—they also engage the reader and spark conversation. So, when conceptualizing your book, consider how your choices will contribute to these goals. With a clear concept, you’ll have a solid foundation to build your coffee table book.

Need some inspiration? Check out these awesome custom coffee table book ideas to see how others have nailed it. Don’t overlook creating mood boards and jotting down all your thoughts, as wild and far-fetched as they may seem. You never know what might turn out to be pure genius.

2. Curate your book’s content

A fundamental step in creating an eye-catching coffee table book is curating your content. Whether your book comprises photographs, artwork, text, or a combination, ensuring that every included piece resonates with your theme and contributes to a cohesive narrative is essential. While you’ve already determined what general content you’ll include, now is the time to gather all your raw materials and begin editing away.

Select high-quality imagery

When it comes to curating your image content for a coffee table book, it’s all about creating a visual narrative that resonates with your chosen theme. Here are some steps to guide you through the process:

• Gather your imagery: Collect all potential images related to your book’s purpose and vision. This is the brainstorming phase, where quantity matters more than quality. Pull from your work, licensed stock photos, or create new images if necessary.
• Sort and select: Now comes the challenging part—choosing the best images. Look for pictures that tell a story, evoke emotions, or catch the eye. Variety is key here: mix close-ups with wide-angle shots, colors with black and white, action shots with still life.
• Create a flow: Arrange your chosen images in a way that tells a story or guides the viewer through your theme. This could be chronological, thematic, or based on visual aesthetics like color or composition.
• Quality check: Ensure all selected images are high resolution for print. Poor-quality images can detract from your book’s overall appeal.

Incorporate relevant text

While coffee table books are primarily visual, the copy is crucial in enhancing the overall narrative and aesthetic appeal. A good coffee table book offers snippets of information that engage readers without overwhelming them—think quotes, anecdotes, or short descriptions relevant to the subject. Here’s how to curate your text:

• Write your copy: Engage the reader and evoke emotion. Use descriptive language to help readers connect with the content by providing additional information that the visuals alone can’t convey.
• Balance text and visuals: Aim for concise but insightful captions and descriptions that add depth to your images without stealing the show. Too much text can be overwhelming, while too little might leave your audience confused.
• Organize your content: Structure your text for easy reading. Use headings and subheadings to break up the text or create sections or chapters based on different themes or topics. This helps guide the reader through your book.
• Edit and proofread: Grammar, spelling, and punctuation errors can distract from your content and appear unprofessional. Consider hiring a professional editor or proofreader to ensure your text is polished and error-free.

3. Choose the right format and size

The size and format of your coffee table book can significantly influence its overall appeal. Traditionally, coffee table bookmakers have been encouraged to go big, as most use an oversized hardcover format. Instead of following the crowd, be practical within your target audience’s budget and the nature of the content you’ve curated.

Here’s what to think about when choosing format and size:

• Orientation: Landscape books set the stage for a cinematic experience, perfect for showcasing photography or art collections. If you’re more into words than visuals, go for portrait orientation, which aligns better with reading habits.
• Book format: There are many different book options on the market, from premium layflat photo books that will show photography seamlessly across spreads to pocket-sized trade books meant to sell.
• Cover: Hardcover or softcover, image wrap or dust jacket—plenty of decisions to make regarding your cover. Remember, this is your chance to stand out.
• Paper quality: High-quality paper adds a touch of luxury and enhances image clarity. It also comes at a premium, so if keeping costs down is important, consider a low-fi look on more economical paper.
• Audience preference: Consider the preferences of your target audience. Would they prefer a compact book that’s easy to handle or a larger one that makes a statement? Do they want a collectible item on museum-quality paper that will last hundreds of years or a rough-and-tumble book to travel with?
• Content: If your book features intricate illustrations or detailed photographs, a larger format will make it easier for your audience to see those details. You might also want to invest in top-tier paper and printing. If not, skip the costly materials for better margins.
• Budget constraints: Larger, hardcover books are typically more expensive to produce and purchase. Make sure the cost aligns with your audience’s budget.
• Uniqueness: A non-traditional size or format can make your book stand out. But it can also force you to do offset printing and buy hundreds of copies up front.

Remember, every decision should emphasize your content, allowing your best work to shine.

4. Design your layouts

A well-crafted design is essential for producing a powerful visual impact. Design page layouts that showcase your content effectively and provide an optimal reading experience.

Be sure to consider the impact of whitespace and how to use it appropriately in your layouts. Whitespace isn’t just empty space; it’s about balance and focus. Use it strategically to guide the reader’s eye and highlight essential elements. 

Think about how you want readers to navigate your book. What should they see first? What should they linger over? These simple layout design concepts can offer a simple starting place:

• Grid-based designs: Clean and structured, perfect for photo-heavy books or aligned text.
• Mixed-layout designs: Flexible and visually interesting, ideal for various content types.
• Singular-focus designs: Let the work speak for itself with one piece per spread.

Consider typography choices too. Font style, size, and color contribute to the aesthetic harmony of your book pages.

Sketch out rough layouts and then use Blurb’s BookWright to craft them digitally. This software offers easy-to-use templates you can customize to suit your vision. But remember that no uniform solution exists when devising coffee table books; your inventiveness is vital.

5. Consider the flow

Your coffee table book’s design is not just about compiling photos or text; it’s about creating an intriguing narrative, a journey for your readers. Consider the flow of your content to make this voyage appealing and seamless. Think about how each page transitions into the next, ensuring no abrupt changes in tone or theme could disrupt your reader’s experience.

Tips for nailing a cohesive flow

• Select your content wisely: Whether it is photographs from your latest project or snippets of prose, choose elements that complement each other well. The best coffee table books tell stories; they aren’t simply collections of unrelated images or texts.
• Create a logical sequence: Arrange your chosen material to create progression and continuity. Like any good story, top coffee table books have clear beginnings, middles, and ends.
• Maintain consistent themes: Don’t plot colorful portraits in the middle if you’re making an Ansel Adams-inspired coffee table book showcasing stunning topographic landscapes in black and white photos. Consistency helps your readers follow your narrative and feel your book is of professional quality.

6. Craft engaging captions and text

If your coffee table book includes text, ensure it’s as captivating as the visuals. You’ve already gathered your copy, but now it’s time to take another pass. 

Remember, captions, anecdotes, quotes, and introductions supplement your book’s storytelling and overall engagement, but balance and execution are key.

• Captions: Add humor and inspiration, or enhance your images’ overall storytelling and contextual delivery by adding captions. They explain what’s happening, who’s in the picture, where it was taken, and its relevance.
• Anecdotes: Stories or descriptions that provide context or additional information about the moment captured in the photo. Anecdotes add a personal touch that keeps readers connected. 
• Quotes: Include quotes from relevant famous individuals or even yourself. They provoke thought and stimulate discussion.
• Introductions: Set expectations with an introduction at the beginning of each book section. In short, lead in by providing background information.

Here are some additional tips for revising your text as you add it to your layout:

• Avoid jargon: It can confuse your readers. Opt for simple language instead.
• Show, don’t tell: Use descriptive language that paints vivid pictures in readers’ minds.
• Edit ruthlessly: Remove unnecessary words and phrases; every word should serve a purpose.

Remember, less is often more when including captions and texts. Don’t overwhelm readers with too much information.

7. Choose a top-notch print service

Don’t underestimate the importance of picking a high-quality print service for your coffee table book. Print quality can make or break your book, so go for a service specializing in bookstore-quality coffee table books.

To help narrow your options, consider these factors:

• Quality: Look for services with rave reviews on print quality, especially for coffee table books.
• Paper type: Different paper types can drastically affect how images look. Make sure the printer offers options suitable for your content.
• Binding options: Coffee table books often use hard-cover binding for durability and an upscale look, but choose what suits your project best.
• Print technology: When going the route of self-publishing, opt for printers that use modern digital technology for better image reproduction.

We’d be remiss if we didn’t mention that a great starting point is Blurb. We offer endless customization options, various sizes, cover styles, and premium paper choices perfect for showcasing stunning visuals in coffee table books. Plus, you can sell your books through global distribution channels like Amazon or the Blurb Bookstore.

8. Review and edit

The final step before printing multiple copies is to print a proof to review and edit your coffee table book. Examine each page thoroughly to ensure flawless design, layout, captions, and overall aesthetic. Go through each page with a critical eye. Is the image quality up to snuff? Is there enough whitespace? Any font inconsistencies?

It can be helpful to gather feedback from detail-oriented friends and colleagues or hire a professional editor to review your book. They might spot things you missed because you’re too close to the project.

9. Plan your budget and pricing strategy

Self-publishing your coffee table book requires careful planning, particularly regarding budgeting. A good coffee table book isn’t the cheapest book to print. You must factor in the pricing of elements like premium quality paper, printing, design work, and distribution.

Estimating production costs

The first step is estimating your production costs. Consider your expenses upfront if you’re creating a premium-grade photo book or using fine art paper for your project. Unlike traditional publishing houses that can absorb production costs due to volume sales projections, self-publishers must fund their projects and estimate their production costs wisely.

Setting your price point

Once you have estimated the production cost per unit, it’s time to set your book price point. It should be affordable enough to attract potential buyers while helping you turn a profit. If generating income from your project is essential to its success, your pricing strategy could make or break it. In turn, it’s critical to know what similar coffee table books sell for, as this information provides insight into what customers might be willing to pay.

10. Marketing and distribution

The most essential elements to have in place when marketing a self-published coffee table book are a well-designed book cover, a great title, and a well-organized flow. In short, the book must be of the best quality possible. So, invest in a professional cover and take the time to polish your content.

With those boxes checked, here are some marketing and distribution tips to help make your coffee table book a success: 

• Be clear about your target audience: Knowing how to market a book is easier if you know who to market to. You already identified your target in step one, but now is the time to narrow down your target audience into smaller categories that are easier to target.
• Establish an online presence and promote your book on social media: Get a professional website, create a blog, and use social media platforms to promote your book. Funneling your marketing efforts and traffic to your website and social media accounts rather than directly to Amazon can be smart.
• Earn Amazon reviews: If you’re distributing your coffee table book on Amazon, encourage readers to leave reviews. This boosts your book’s visibility and overall credibility.
• Join online book clubs and forums: Engage with readers and other authors in online book clubs and forums. This builds relationships and gets your book in front of more people.
• Offer free copies to book bloggers and reviewers: Reach out to book bloggers and reviewers to offer them a free copy of your book in exchange for an honest review. This helps increase your book’s visibility and credibility.
• Host a launch event: Celebrate the moment with a launch event! Throwing a book party is a perfect way to engage with your readers and promote your book.
• Attend book fairs and events: Attend book fairs and events to promote your book and connect with potential readers.
• Use metadata to optimize your book’s discoverability: Use relevant keywords and categories to optimize your book’s discoverability on online platforms and search engines.

Wrapping it up 

Creating a coffee table book is an artistic endeavor that demands creativity, vision, and a keen understanding of your target audience. It’s more than just a collection of images; it’s a tangible expression of your passion and a way to share that with others.

From defining the purpose of your book to planning its launch, every step in the process is crucial. Remember, your book should be aesthetically pleasing, engaging, and meaningful to your readers. So as you embark on this journey, remember to keep your target audience in mind, as they are the ones who will ultimately connect with your work. Make sure your book resonates with their interests, lifestyle, and budget.

Ultimately, the most important thing is to create something you’re proud of that represents your unique vision and aesthetic. With careful planning and a clear concept, you’ll be well on your way to creating a coffee table book that stands out.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform that enables creators to produce high-quality works that rival traditional publishing houses and access the global market through an online bookstore and distribution channels. 

If your goal isn’t simply to make a stunning piece of home decor but to bring your passion project to life and share it around the globe, Blurb is an accessible platform to start your journey. To get the ball rolling, register an account today.

The post How to make a coffee table book: A 10-step guide to getting started appeared first on Blurb Blog.

First, let’s discuss the details. The mini square comes in a softcover with a matte finish and can hold anywhere from 20 to 80 pages. You can print on the front and back covers and the spine. We use Premium Lustre paper, which you’ll love for its rich colors and deep blacks with high contrast and good saturation. We like to say it’s premium-grade paper at a mid-grade cost. And it’s Forest Stewardship Council certified.

Now onto the fun part. The mini square has incredible versatility and potential—especially as a keepsake or gift. The fact that it comes with a mini price point of $12 makes it all the more appealing. 

Mini square ideas

Not sure where to start? Here are a few ideas we think the mini square is perfect for.

Travel and road trips

Camping weekends, smaller getaways, even birthday trips would benefit from a smaller commemoration of the fun had and memories made.

Family vacations 

Whether snorkeling or skiing or scaling roller coasters, the mini square is ideal for capturing family time. Consider making one for each trip or every year to have a full set of memories to look back on.

Baby books

Mini humans make for great subjects of the mini square. Gather your favorite shots and give them as gifts to grandparents. The size is perfect for portraiture since we all know there are never too many pics of your beautiful baby! 

Custom wedding keepsakes

Picture this: different photo books of your wedding, each with their own focus. While one features bridesmaids, another highlights family. And you guessed it, they make perfect gifts, too.

Holiday and stocking stuffers

The mini square makes the perfect gift. It will fit as snugly into a stocking as it does in a gift bag or shipping envelope. There’s no end to what you fill it with either: pet pics, art, street photography, your smiling face.

Mother’s Day and Father’s Day

You might want to include tissues with these for all the tears of joy they’ll bring! Photos of you and your parent through the years are sure to melt many a heart, not to mention proudly appearing on nightstand tables. 

Everyday casual moments

A small book of all the things that make you happy? One devoted to butterflies or your favorite animal? Your yearly Halloween costume party? We made the mini square for singular reasons and the mini moments in your life. 

How to make your mini square

So now that you know what to make, let’s talk about how. You can design using our free bookmaking software BookWright, with versatile and flexible design templates, layout suggestions, image retouching, and other tools built right in. Or you can use our Adobe InDesign plugin or PDF uploader. 

If you’re a creative professional wanting to sell your book, the mini square (like all photo book sizes) can be sold on the Blurb Bookstore and through Amazon* both at the same time to encourage more interest. Our print-on-demand capabilities mean you can print as many copies as you want upfront or one-by-one as the orders come in. And all our books are delivered with a removable barcode on the back and shrink-wrapped to protect them from dirt and dust.

Whew! That was a lot of info for a mini-sized object, but trust us, the mini square is the best thing since—and ironically almost the same size as—sliced bread. Give it a try. We know you’ll love creating, owning, and gifting it. 

Ready to make a photo book? Choose from six book sizes (but do try our mini square at some point!).

 *Not applicable for books made with our iOS app.

The post Blurb announces the Mini Square photo book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Since your book will definitely be judged by its cover, it’s absolutely crucial that you make a compelling first impression. A strong visual impact entices people to pick up your book and helps communicate its tone and content.

While you can explore limitless creativity when designing a book cover, there are also fundamental best practices you shouldn’t overlook. So before you open Photoshop, InDesign, or Canva, let’s first unpack professional tips to ensure it’s a success.

Three things you must know about book covers

There’s no doubt that you want your book to pop among other titles in your genre. Doing so requires a striking cover design that dazzles target readers and evokes a sense of curiosity and interest. 

Before getting to the how-to tips behind your book cover design, there are a few hard and fast realities to respect. But don’t worry. Designing isn’t necessarily a project to pursue alone. Sure, you can take the creative lead, but it’s vital to research beforehand and recruit the right help where needed.  

Book covers: we all judge them

According to one survey, 79% of people claim that a book’s cover influenced their decision to purchase it. While that may put pressure on you as a creator, the fact that most of us judge a book by its cover can be an opportunity to leverage. 

We, as humans, are biologically wired to absorb visual elements to determine our likes and dislikes. Images, colors, and designs immediately trigger our brains. We are automatically drawn to beautiful books and must consciously dismiss poorly-designed books to give them a second chance. That’s a second chance you don’t want to count on.

There’s no debating that people will judge your book cover within seconds of seeing it. The key is harnessing that inevitable judgment as a pivotal moment to grab readers’ attention and lure them into reading your book.

Case study: Portals

The same cover design study above found that most respondents believe covers are the “artistic representation” of a book and should accurately portray the book’s genre, tone, and content. Jeff Quinn uses everything at his disposal—from title to white space to color palate to art choice—so viewers immediately know what is inside, despite its minimalist approach.

Guess the contents of this book based solely on the cover.

Ready for the answer? Quinn’s book PORTALS is his exhibition catalog for his artwork. It blends trippy visuals and calming colors to draw readers into other dimensions. From cover to back page, you’ll encounter windows to new worlds.

Hiring a book cover designer pays dividends

There’s a reason why most self-publishers recruit the help of an experienced book cover designer. Most creators are not designers. And there are plenty of talented professionals who are. 

We’re not saying you shouldn’t design your book cover. But if you’re serious about creating a high-quality product that stands out in your book genre, investing in an experienced designer helps to ensure that your vision is accurately and professionally realized.

Creative talent pools and freelance directories like Reedsy, Upwork, 99designs, and Guru are good places to start. Depending on the artist’s rates, you can expect to pay between $250 and $800+ for a professionally-designed book cover. But this investment can yield high returns if you aim to publish a successful finished product that stands out in a bookstore. 

It’s smart to conduct market research

Creating an original cover that resonates with your target audience requires market research within your specific book genre. This includes analyzing bestselling books in similar categories and understanding current trends and reader preferences. 

By researching the market, you gain awareness of what attracts potential customers. This invaluable knowledge can fuel inspiration for your cover. You can start by:

• Browsing through top-selling books on platforms like Amazon or Goodreads within your chosen genre. Take note of common themes or styles across various covers.
• Visiting bookstores or libraries to observe physical copies of popular titles, paying attention to the overall design, color schemes, and typography choices that stand out on shelves.
• Researching book cover design trends to understand what’s hot right now. Some of the most popular trends of 2023 include bold typography and loud maximalism, nature-inspired photography, parametric patterns, and conceptual cover sleeves.

Case study: Nudes, Nudes, Nudes

Aesthetics change from culture to culture and century to century. A compelling book cover from the 1800s in India was significantly different than what’s hot in 2023 in the United States. Beautiful book covers change from year to year, even! Look at books with multiple editions—many have a totally different style than their first print.

Edgar Alanis’s 2022 self-published book Nudes, Nudes, Nudes is a masterclass in what’s trending today.

This cover is a bold example of incorporating skin-toned color choices, bold yet playful typography, and a provoking maximalist composition. It’s obvious he incorporated research and trends into his cover design—helping his book appeal to readers in his quirky, sardonic target market.

Tips for designing a professional book cover

Whether you’re keen on working with an artist or plan to take a DIY approach, you’re the creative director behind your book cover’s design. So how do you combine all these elements to bring your book cover concept to life? 

These are the steps the professionals take when conceptualizing a book cover—you can take them too.

Gather inspiration for your book cover design

As part of your market research, exploring other book covers offers a wealth of creative inspiration. Browse books on Amazon Best Sellers or skim websites like Book Cover Archive. Expose yourself to hundreds of professional book covers and see what grabs your attention. Analyze the elements that make specific covers eye-catching and memorable while conveying their intended message.

Take this exercise a step further and check out covers from popular books in your genre. What do you like or dislike about related books in your space? How can you differentiate your books from others recently published? 

As you take notes, remember this isn’t about replicating what others are doing. Instead, it’s about creative positioning and imagining a cover that will stand out on the shelf.

Outline your book’s central themes

A beautifully-designed book cover provides potential readers a glimpse of its contents while leaving them wanting more. Identify and outline your book’s key themes or motifs to inform your cover design concept. The outcome should connect the visuals on the cover to what lies within its pages.

Let’s look at an example. The central themes of Empowering and Inspiring Women Part 2 focus on creativity, resilience, inspiration, empowerment, and perseverance. The book emphasizes the role and rights of children, particularly the journey of girls blossoming into leaders. However, the intended audience is wide, speaking to parents, educators, and leaders who support the value of women in their communities.

These themes served as guiding principles for a compelling cover for the book—from the choice of bold black and red colors, inspiring and joyful photography, and the mix of powerful and feminine typography.

Now it’s your turn. Based on your book’s core themes, what’s the feeling or mood you want to evoke? What message do you wish to convey? What style of imagery might capture your book’s essence?

Outlining your book’s central themes informs your color, imagery, design, and copy choices. These combined elements offer prospective readers a clear and inspired idea of what your book is about. This process can help jump-start your book cover brief. 

Assemble a book cover brief

Like the creative brief for a logo or the content brief of an article, your book cover brief is a helpful guidepost that instructs the design process. In essence, a book cover brief documents the basic information about your book and what boxes the cover should check. 

Your book cover brief can take many shapes. But a few key elements will make your brief most helpful to your designer—whether your designer is you or someone else!

Here’s what you need to include:

• The exact dimensions and cover details, like cover type, book type, and if foil or other unique design elements should be used. Don’t forget to include where your book’s barcode will live!*
• Design suggestions like brand identity elements, mood board inspiration, color palate, and details for the book’s overarching visual appeal. 
• The specific copy you want to include, like your name, book title, subtitle, tagline, reviews, and other key text. Think about your spine, flaps, and back cover—you might want to include awards and an author bio.
• A summary of the book’s genre, target audience, and target market demographics.
• Background context, like a book synopsis or short description of the book, its core themes, and any main characters.
• Your deadline, budget, and dates for feedback or check-ins.
• Examples of book covers you love and dislike—plus an explanation of the why behind each.

This brief is an essential communication tool when working with a designer. But it can also provide a framework to help keep your cover design project organized if you’re building your own.

Consider visual hierarchy

Visual hierarchy refers to how our eyes perceive different elements based on size, color, contrast, and alignment, allowing us to process information more efficiently. When designing your book cover, sketching each element’s general size and location can be helpful. 

Apply this principle when designing a professional book cover by asking yourself a few questions:

• What’s most important? Decide how to prioritize the essential components like title, author name, and imagery.
• Where do you want your reader’s eyes to go next? Use this to create balance through symmetry or asymmetry—depending on the desired mood or tone.
• How can you use color and white space to make what’s critical pop? Try contrast to make critical elements stand out from the background.

Let’s look at a book that makes the focal point very easy to discover.  Jillian Poll’s liberal use of white space in the top half of the book cover of Zip. Zero. Zilch. speaks volumes about the book’s premise while balancing color contrast, alignment, and asymmetry. It’s a great example of a book cover design that does more with less. Plus, in a sea of recipe books featuring food or beverage photography, Poll’s book stands out!

Deciding upon your visual hierarchy and sketching out your cover’s balance, contrast, and genre-specific elements enables you to craft an eye-catching book cover that effectively conveys your story’s essence. Stay true to your genre and personal aesthetic while experimenting with design elements, as this helps establish a cohesive visual identity for your work.

Select your fonts and colors

A crucial aspect of creating an attractive and readable book cover is selecting fonts and colors that complement each other while also fitting with your book’s overall theme or mood. When making these choices, you’ll want to keep legibility in mind. After all, what good is text you can’t read when deciding whether to buy a book? 

When making a color palate, consider contrast as well—online contrast checkers allow you to make your cover accessible to everyone, especially those with visual disabilities.

Choose your fonts based on readability and style

The right font can significantly impact how your book cover resonates. It should be easily readable, even in smaller sizes like thumbnails, while still reflecting the tone of your content. 

When selecting a font, consider both print and digital compatibility and your book’s genre. Some popular options include serif fonts for traditional genres like historical fiction or non-fiction books, sans-serif fonts for modern or minimalist designs, script-style typefaces for romance novels, and more.

Here’s an example. Michael Johnson’s Success! makes bold use of color while capturing the book’s mood with a clever illustration and the classic Blambot-style comic font for the author and subtitle. You immediately understand that this is a comic book, just with the font selection. 

Note his use of two fonts—one in all caps for his name and subtitle in different sizes and another bold, hand-drawn font that makes the title stand out and matches the illustration. 

You’ll find many cover designs that blend two contrasting fonts. More than two, and your book cover can feel cluttered. But relying on a single font when you have a lot of text can make a book feel too simple.

Evoke emotion with your color scheme

Colors play a vital role in setting the mood of your book cover design. Different hues can evoke various emotions, so choosing a color scheme that aligns with your story’s themes helps create an impactful visual representation. For example:

• Mystery/thriller: Darker shades like black, gray, and deep reds might be suitable.
• Romance: Soft pastels or warm tones convey feelings of love and passion.
• Fantasy/sci-fi: Vibrant colors or metallic accents add excitement to fantastical worlds.

Take Gina Nicole Ballard’s typography and color palette. Her book, Moon Cycle Memoirs, clearly states the book’s purpose while using bright and dreamy watercolor blends and a creative mix of fonts. The first thing that catches your eye is the stunning moon illustration in deep purples, reds, and a splash of yellow. That yellow splash focuses readers squarely on the title.

Ballard’s title is placed at the center in two fonts—a legible sans-serif and an imaginative handwriting pick. She uses that same legible font in varying sizes for the rest of the text on her front cover, which helps it feel cohesive.

Beyond the primary colors used in your design, paying attention to contrast is also essential. For instance, choose lighter text colors for readability if your cover has a dark background image. Ballard has done just that—alternating between dark font on the yellow part of her design and lighter font on the deep red background.

Make your title stand out

An attention-grabbing title can make all the difference between someone picking up your book or passing it by. Choose typography that emphasizes key words without overwhelming potential readers with a cluttered design.

Increase your font size

You’ve already chosen the typography you want for your cover; now it’s time to play with it. Bumping your title’s size up all the way helps your cover stand out from a distance. Try playing with bold, italics, and underlining, too. What allows your title to jump off the shelf? 

Alecia Renece’s Black Girl Creative Manifesto is a perfect example. She picked an authoritative, clear title font and increased its size to nearly as high as possible. She bolded and centered her title and interspersed her book’s subtitle between each word in a smaller, dark, and unbolded font. It’s a great example of using size to emphasize important words and capture attention without sacrificing readability.

Let your title breathe

Beyond choosing an appropriate font style, balancing text size with other elements on the cover is essential. White space is a great way to ensure your text is easy to read and stands out from its background. 

As you continue designing your cover, keep track of how much text will fit in each space—this will help the design look balanced and offer plenty of breathing room for your readers. Return to your visual hierarchy plan as you consider the negative space around your title. Where are you drawing the eye?

A great example of text and spatial balance is Juan Camillo Garza’s I’m Here. Garza gives a clear sense of the book’s serious mood by choosing a hollow, black-and-white font that compliments his illustration. He then pairs it with a generous amount of negative space, which gives the title and his name extra emphasis.  

Here’s what to keep in mind when thinking about your title.

• Limit the text. Keep in mind that too much text can be overwhelming for readers. When in doubt, opt for fewer words and more visual elements. If your title is long, cut your subtitle down. 
• Play with your visual hierarchy. Arrange each element on your cover according to its importance. If your title is most important, make it the biggest part of your design. If your name draws attention, let it take up more space than a photo.
• Add lots of negative space. Add breathing room around each text element so nothing feels cramped or overcrowded. Providing adequate spacing between lines of text helps improve legibility while creating a more visually appealing design. 

Remember your book’s spine and back cover

It can be easy to overlook your spine and back cover details and focus solely on your front cover. But these areas provide valuable real estate opportunities for creator bios, endorsements and reviews from industry professionals, book summaries, and other info that can entice readers to crack a book open.  

Design an engaging spine

The spine of your book is often the first thing potential readers see when browsing a bookstore shelf. So make it count! Your spine should be visually appealing while still providing essential information about your book.

Here’s what to remember.

• Select a legible font. Choose a clear typeface that matches the style used on your front cover for consistency. Make the size as big as possible to read from a distance.

• Place your title front and center. Ensure your title and subtitle are placed prominently on the spine and easily readable—even from afar. (This is so important we said it twice.)
• Add your name. While your title is the most important thing to include, readers want to know who you are, too. 
• Avoid excessive text or images. Keep it simple! Too much clutter can make your spine hard to read and less aesthetically pleasing.
• Use contrasting colors. Make sure your font’s color stands out against your spine’s background.

Effectively use your back cover space

Your book’s back cover design is crucial in convincing potential readers to purchase your book after they’ve picked it up off the shelf. It also has the most space for text and additional information—so there’s a lot to consider. 

While most of these elements are optional, there are some best practices for effectively using your back cover.

• Create an enticing blurb or synopsis. Summarize what makes your story unique without giving away any spoilers. Your book’s blurb should pique interest while leaving them wanting more.
• Include your bio and photo. A brief introduction to the author and an on-brand photograph help readers connect with you on a personal level. 
• Add endorsements or reviews. If your book has received praise from industry professionals or other published creators, include these quotes as social proof of your work’s quality. You can even add reviews from Goodreads or Amazon if you already have a book out.
• Mention awards or other books. If your book is affiliated with a prestigious award or if you’ve written other books, don’t forget to mention those, too! It establishes credibility and allows readers who haven’t heard of you to take a chance.
• Incorporate relevant visuals. Use images that complement the front cover design and provide additional context for potential buyers.
• Remember your barcode and ISBN. Many printers have a specific location your barcode and ISBN must be.* Keep it in mind as you design your back cover.

Peek at an example. For the back cover of The Modern American Dream, Jayk Sterkenburg stays on brand with paradigm-shifting prompts that flow with the book’s title and premise, along with personalized touches about his travel aspirations. 

A pull quote is at the top of his back cover, so readers get a sense of his writing style. From there, Sterkenburg goes into a blurb with many thought-provoking questions. Finally, he ends with a photo and author bio—plus a few design details that give you a sense of the memoir’s setting.

Taking the time to design your spine and back cover thoughtfully increases your book’s chances of being picked up and bought by readers browsing the shelves. Give yourself plenty of time to play with your design. 

Get feedback

Whether you’ve designed your book cover yourself or hired an expert, requesting feedback on the final design is critical. Ask for honest opinions from acquaintances, peers, and industry professionals. If you’re unsure where to turn, join online forums and ask fellow self-publishers for their opinion and guidance! The more opinions, the better.

Listen to every suggestion and incorporate any relevant feedback into your final design before getting ready to publish. From there, you’ll want to print a single proof and double-check that your cover (and book interior) are picture-perfect before listing your book in bookstores.

Get started today

Creating an eye-catching book cover is essential for any self-publisher who wants to sell their work. By leveraging the power of research and thoughtful design choices on your front and back cover, you can design a book that will draw in readers browsing store shelves. 

After reading this guide, we hope you feel more confident about designing your book cover. So what are you waiting for? Make a stunning design that will help launch your book into the world.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform allowing you to create, print, promote, and sell your books. If you’re ready to put these tips into action, try BookWright today. This free-to-download book design tool makes it possible to design stunning covers without graphic design experience.

*Note: If printing a Blurb trade book, your barcode and ISBN will be automatically placed during production and can’t be moved or omitted.

The post How to design a book cover: professional tips for success appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Self-publishing a photo book can have real value for your business, from generating book sales, pitching yourself to new clients, or creating a package that includes a gorgeous printed book. So whether you’re a professional photographer, painter, sculptor, designer, culinary artist, or other creative—you can and should capture and compile your work into a pro-level photo book. But even when our work and creative abilities are strong, assembling that work into a cohesive and captivating book might still be challenging! 

These photo book design tips for creatives will help you build a professional, finished product while giving you ample creative leeway to communicate your unique vision.

Create an eye-catching cover

Your photo book cover is your book’s first impression on your audience, so it’s essential to make it count. An eye-catching cover entices potential readers and sets the tone for what’s inside. Here are some tips on how to create a captivating cover:

• Select a representative image. Choose a photo or image of your work that captures the essence of your craft and showcases your unique style. This could be one of your most striking photos or an abstract design that reflects your book’s theme.
• Be clear on the purpose of your book. Your cover should reflect the purpose and intention of your photo book. Is it a travel photo book, a family portrait album for a client, or a portfolio of your sports photography? Make sure the cover accurately represents the content inside.
• Play with typography. Pair your chosen image with appropriate typography to enhance its visual appeal. Try different font sizes, styles, and colors to find the ideal combination that reflects your brand or personal style. Check out resources like Google Fonts for inspiration. Remember to stick to two to three fonts max, as more can confuse your design.
• Avoid clutter. Less is often more in cover design. Too many elements may detract from its overall impact. Stick to clean lines and simple compositions for maximum effect.
• Create multiple designs. Don’t settle for just one option—experiment with various layouts, images, and text combinations until you find a look that truly represents you as a creator.

Crafting an alluring cover will distinguish your professional photo book design from the rest. Taking time to create an engaging cover will pay off by attracting attention from potential readers, especially those browsing online. After all, people do judge books by their covers.

Be thoughtful with page layouts

Designing the page layouts for your photo book can be a challenging task. How do you organize your images and text to best features your work and convey your book’s narrative? Follow these best practices to assemble professional-looking page layouts.

• Less is more. Just as you did with your cover, avoid cluttering your pages with too many photos, images, or other elements. Keep it simple and let your creative work shine by giving it room to breathe.
• Keep your layouts balanced. Balance is key to making a professional-looking photo book. Make sure individual pages are well-balanced and create a connection between the cover and the interior pages.
• Establish a focal point. Choose a main photo or element to draw the viewer’s eye. This creates a sense of proportion and visual interest.
• Mix up your spreads. Vary your page layouts to keep the viewer engaged. Try using double-page spreads for panoramic shots and single-page layouts for close-ups. Mix text and images, layer elements, and create section spreads to break up dense portions further.
• Tell a story. Leverage your page layouts to tell a story or convey your theme. Consider the flow and sequence to establish a logical progression for your readers and create a cohesive and meaningful photo book.

By carefully considering the size, shape, and placement of the images and text on each page, you can create compelling page layouts that will grab your readers and make your work stand out. 

And remember, if it is stressful to build your own layouts, use templates! There’s no reason to reinvent the wheel when it comes to simple, clean book design.

Narrow down your typography

Typography is crucial in conveying the underlying mood and style of any professional photo book design. The right font choices complement your images and enhance the overall aesthetic of your book while creating a visual hierarchy to guide your readers.

You’re likely drawn to a few different fonts as you build your cover and interior page layouts. Now it’s time to narrow your selections and create continuity throughout your book.

Find the perfect fonts

When selecting fonts for your photo book, consider how they interact with your images. A well-chosen font should be legible and reflect your desired tone. 

For instance, if you’re showcasing minimalist architecture photography, a clean sans-serif typeface might be an ideal choice. But for something more authoritative and loud, try a font like Visage Bold or League Gothic.

While there aren’t rules for typography, most creators pick two to three fonts for an entire book. This allows your photo book to feel cohesive and timeless. Play with your title, headline, and body fonts—how do they work together, and how do they contrast? 

Build visual hierarchy

To ensure that text elements are easy on the eyes while maintaining focus on the photos themselves, use varying font sizes or weights to establish a clear visual hierarchy within the pages. This technique helps distinguish the headings and subheadings from body text, guiding readers seamlessly throughout content sections without overwhelming them visually.

Spend time increasing and decreasing your font size. It’s a dance—what is legible while still appropriately filling the space?

Play with colors

Your color palette helps orient your audience to the tone, setting, and era. It’s an incredibly important step in the process. As you work through your cover and layouts, selecting your images, you probably get a sense of the mood and repetitive focal hues. Use it to choose colors for design elements and text.

• Be selective. Experimenting with color can add depth or emphasis to specific text areas, like captions accompanying photographs. But just remember not to overdo it with too much color composition and stick to a handful of colors for consistent branding. Three to five colors usually work for a cohesive palette. 

• Maintain readability. When choosing colored fonts against backgrounds and images, prioritize readability by providing sufficient contrast so viewers can easily discern words.
• Choose cohesion. Lastly, ensure chosen colors align well with the overall design palette and theme, maintaining consistency throughout the book.

Remember, typography is a powerful tool in your photo book design arsenal. Meticulously selecting typefaces and toying with magnitude, look, and shade blends to create an alluring visual narrative.

Pay attention to the details

The small details can significantly elevate your professional photo book’s design, making it more engaging and professional. Many decisions go into choosing the right details—from text overlays to paper selection—so it’s a good idea to break down the process into smaller pieces, starting with these elements.

Edit your images intentionally

When creating a professional photo book, it’s essential to edit your images thoughtfully. Every decision you make when editing your photos can help bring out the best in them and create an engaging visual narrative for your readers. Do this in two steps.

• Calibrate your monitor. If you haven’t calibrated your monitor, you can’t trust the color, contrast, or brightness you see while designing. While your book might look fantastic on your display, it’s unlikely to look good in print.
• Edit one by one and as a collection. Now it’s time to go through each image to color correct individually. Next, look at your spreads—how can you tweak your images so they fit together? Finally, review your entire book and edit your photos as a single collection.

Add captions and descriptions

Adding captions or descriptions to your images provides context and engages readers by telling the story behind each photograph. This extra layer of information can deepen the connection between viewers and your work with another narrative element. 

However, be sure to use text mindfully and creatively where appropriate, and avoid overusing text to distract from your work. While copy can add to your storytelling abilities, the best photo books speak for themselves visually.

Pick your paper type

The tactile experience of flipping through a physical photo book is essential to its appeal. The right paper type and finish are significant decisions, as they influence the final color and look of the very images in your book.

We’re obsessed with these details. Here are the paper types we consider when designing a photo book—and when we use them. 

• Lustre paper. A popular option for photo books with a slight sheen that offers excellent color reproduction. It is also durable and resistant to fingerprints, which works well for portfolios and pitch decks.
• Standard paper. A versatile choice for hardback and paperback photo books, this classic paper is suitable for books of all sizes and offers a good balance between cost and quality. We use it for leave-behinds, zines, and sellable books when the margins matter more.
• Mohawk proPhoto Pearl. For a luxurious, high-end paper that will make your images pop, Mohawk proPhoto Pearl is the perfect paper type selection. This paper is ideal for event-specific books, like family portrait albums.
• Mohawk Superfine Eggshell. A heavyweight text paper with an eggshell-textured, uncoated finish that adds a touch of elegance and refinement. We pick this paper for wedding albums, engagement photo books, and any other heirloom-quality prints.

Weight, color, and coating all play a critical role in the finished product of your photo book. For more input, read how to choose your paper type.

Proofread copy carefully

This is where hiring an editor or proofreader can pay dividends with your photo book, especially if you plan to sell and distribute your book to the masses. When proofing your book’s text, it’s critical to evaluate your copy for three things.

• Typos. Ensure there are no spelling mistakes in the book’s captions, descriptions, or other written content as they detract from professionalism.
• Syntax. Check sentence structure for readability; awkward phrasing might confuse readers or disrupt their engagement with images.
• Punctuation. Proper punctuation helps maintain clarity throughout written content so that meaning isn’t lost to misinterpretation caused by missing commas or periods.

Incorporating these finer details produces a polished final product that showcases visual artistry and thoughtful craftsmanship in your professional-quality photo book.

Seamless navigation

Creating a seamless flow and navigation experience for your readers is essential to a professionally-designed photo book. A well-organized book not only boosts the general quality of your photo book but also moves readers to explore your content. A few key elements contribute to smooth navigation in professional photo books.

• Table of contents: A categorized list of book chapters or sections provides a straightforward way to locate specific material swiftly. They’re particularly handy for photo books with multiple themes or categories.
• Page numbers: Page numbers are helpful to guide readers. Ensure they’re consistent in style and placement throughout the book, typically placed at each page’s bottom corner or center.
• Index (if applicable): If you feature numerous subjects or keywords in your photo book, consider adding an index at the end. An index provides alphabetical listings with corresponding page numbers so readers can quickly locate specific topics without flipping through countless pages.

Incorporating these navigational elements into your professional photo book will make it more user-friendly and accessible, ultimately enhancing its appeal when selling your book online.

Consistent Branding

As a professional creative, branding is critical to establishing your identity and making your photo book memorable. You create a cohesive look and feel that reflects your unique style by incorporating consistent branding elements like your logo or identity mark, color palette, and typography throughout your book.

Brand identity integration

Your brand identity, like your logo or author signature, serves as a visual representation and reminder of you as the creator behind your book. If applicable, include your brand identity elements in strategic locations within your photo book, like on the cover, title page, table of contents, or the corners of each page. This helps reinforce brand recognition and makes a lasting impression on readers.

Consistent color palette

We’ve talked about this before, and we’ll talk about it again—color is that important! Selecting a color palette that complements your images and adheres to brand guidelines ensures consistency across all design elements. Use these colors consistently across all design elements, like text boxes, backgrounds, borders, or image filters.

Cohesive typography choices

While you’ve selected fonts during your cover and layout phases, it’s worth it to take a final look at your choices. Stick with fonts that reflect the tone of your work and support existing branding materials—like your website, brochures, or other collections. 

This ensures consistency throughout every aspect of work now and in the future. In doing so, maintain font hierarchy using different font sizes or weights for headings versus body text. If you can nail this detail initially, you’ll have a clear idea of how to approach it throughout your photo book and for future projects.

Test and iterate

With any professionally-made book, you must test your creation with a sample audience and gather feedback. This process enables necessary revisions and improvements, ensuring that your photo book meets the highest professionalism and design excellence standards.

Share your draft with fellow professionals, friends, or family members who can provide valuable insights into what works well in your book and areas that need improvement. Encourage them to be honest about their opinions on layout, typography, image selection, and overall aesthetics. You can also use online platforms like Behance or Dribbble for additional feedback from creative communities.

Hire a photo book editor

If you can afford it, it usually pays off to hire a professional who can help ensure that your work reflects your vision. A photo book editor has lots of experience and expertise in evaluating photos and text for accuracy, clarity, and consistency. An editor can bring a fresh perspective to the project and offer advice on everything from the overall concept to the tiniest details.

Speaking of details, having an experienced eye can save time by catching errors before they become costly mistakes. Your editor should know how to spot subtle issues like typos or awkward phrasing—plus more significant problems like a confusing cover design or inconsistent design choices. 

Start your professional photo book design with Blurb

Blurb is an online tool that allows you to design and publish a professional photo book as well as sell and distribute your book globally. Choose from our free design tool, BookWright, or leverage Adobe InDesign, Lightroom, and Photoshop integrations to design your book. Our free and fully customizable templates make it easy to get started without photo book design experience. 

When ready to publish, we provide a wide range of custom format options, like the popular layflat photo book or a more economical softcover format, as well as an assortment of paper options. Once published, you can sell your book through Amazon or Blurb’s Bookstore. 

Interested? Learn more about how to create a professional-quality photo book with Blurb today.

The post Professional photo book design tips for creatives appeared first on Blurb Blog.

If you’re a writer—or aspiring to be one—you know creating a writing portfolio is essential. Whether you’re graduating from ad school, switching industries or careers, or selling yourself as a freelancer, your writing portfolio is an essential tool to show (rather than tell) people how good you are.

Employers, clients, and even programs almost always ask for a portfolio in the selection process, whether you specialize in copywriting, blogging, UX writing, technical writing, journalism, fiction, poetry, or something else entirely. So getting a jump-start on selecting, designing, and editing your book before you start applications is a good idea.

But how do you create a writing portfolio? What should it look like? How do you select your samples? And should you make it digital or print? There’s a lot to consider when creating your portfolio, and it can seem daunting. But don’t worry! We’re here to help you get started.

What is a writing portfolio?

A writing portfolio is a collection of your best writing samples to tangibly prove yourself as a writer, editor, and marketer. Your portfolio is your best chance to show freelance clients, publishers, and hiring managers that you know your stuff. It also helps them get a sense of what kind of writing you specialize in, your style, voice, tone, and versatility, as well as any other relevant skills or services you offer.

No matter your level of experience, a strong portfolio can help you stand out from the crowd. It’s also an evolving document—it doesn’t have to be perfect on the first day (and it probably won’t be). As you grow in your profession, you can add or update samples, or even start fresh with a new portfolio if need be.

Why do you need a writing portfolio?

A portfolio has become an essential tool for any creative professional, especially when it comes to the written word. Bloggers, authors, copywriters, and storytellers can all leverage a writing portfolio to position themselves in a competitive landscape. 

Whether you’re a freelancer bidding on a gig or a UX writer applying for a job, your writing portfolio will help improve your hireability while giving prospects a taste of your personality and skill set. In almost any form of professional writing—be it billboards, emails, video ads, or social posts—having a portfolio is a requirement to even be considered.

How to create a writing portfolio: 7 fundamental steps

The point of a portfolio is to give viewers a sense of what you can do for them. And portfolios can look very different while still getting that job done. Some of our Blurb writers have gotten hired by emailing screenshots of Facebook posts—while others have opened up professionally bound layflat photo books during interviews. Keeping in mind your end goal (selling yourself) will help ground you in this process.

Here are seven steps to help you create the perfect writing portfolio:

1. Introduce yourself

If your portfolio is your full sales pitch, think of your introduction as your elevator pitch. This sets the tone and context for your work. State your name, the type of writing you do, and any relevant background information that describes who you are.

Remember, this is a writing sample, too.  Make it unique, valuable, and memorable—and from your natural voice. This is your chance to tell your story from your point of view. Make it count.

2. Organize your writing samples

Gather up all relevant writing samples you have. These can be everything from Super Bowl ads you’ve scripted to op-eds you’ve written for your high school newspaper. And if you don’t have enough, you can create hypothetical projects for brands that exist or that you make up to showcase your skills—just make it clear they’re examples and not paid work.

Once you have all your writing samples gathered, it’s time to organize them. Keep in mind who you’re showing your work to and include the type of samples they’re most interested in. If you’re angling to carve a niche, consider grouping your work into topic or format clusters. If you’re showing off versatility, group them by medium.

Here are the top ways to organize your writing portfolio:

• Chronologically: If you have a wide range of writing samples or a linear progression in your career, consider arranging your work chronologically and share how your skills have evolved.
• Topic: If you specialize in particular types of writing, you could group your samples by topic. For example, you could organize your work by industry for your technical writing or trade book writing—or by sections dedicated to industries, verticals, or genres.
• Medium: If you write for various mediums and channels, be it journalism stories, ad creative, UX writing, storytelling, or blogging, organize your work by these key pillars to help readers understand your versatility as a writer.

No matter how you organize your work, start and end with your strongest samples. Recruiters spend less than three minutes per portfolio, whereas most hiring managers spend five to 10 minutes. Either way, that’s not a lot of time. Make sure your portfolio makes a splash to start and is easily scannable.

3. Cull your writing samples

Once you’ve compiled all relevant writing samples for your portfolio, now comes the difficult task of narrowing them down. If you’re in the early stages of your career, you may not have a lot of work to distill. But for experienced writers, it’s important to whittle down your samples to showcase only your best work. 

When making the final selection of samples to include in your writing portfolio, consider the following:

• Diversity: Depending on the structure you envision for your portfolio, consider choosing samples that capture your range and versatility as a writer. For example, creative writers might want to include a mix of short stories, screenplays, essays, or novels.
• Relevance: Your writing samples should reflect the type of writing you want to do in the future. If you’re interested in writing for a particular publication, highlight samples that overlap with that publication’s style and tone.
• Quality: As a rule, only include your best work when creating a writing portfolio. It can be helpful to recruit a mentor, friend, or colleague to get different perspectives on what others view as your highest-quality samples.

4. Craft your navigation

As you organize and narrow down what work samples you’d like to include, you can start identifying patterns for structuring your writing portfolio. In doing so, think about how you’d like viewers to navigate your book.

A table of contents, menu, or sections can provide guideposts for viewers to better travel through your writing portfolio and understand what it includes. In addition to thematic structure and the general flow of your portfolio, consider design elements like thumbnail images for each piece or major section. This adds a visual appeal and a touch of creativity that goes a long way in grabbing your prospective readers. Other fundamentals include:

• Sections: If you have ample writing samples to include, divide your portfolio into sections or chapters. This will make it easier for readers to find the pieces they’re most interested in.
• Navigation: Make sure your table of contents or website menu is simple to understand. In a digital context, you can include links to each section or piece of writing for easy navigation.
• Design: Your portfolio should be clean, clear, concise, and easy to read. Set the mood appropriately and use a consistent font, color scheme, and design elements for your sections, headlines, and menus to make them cohesive with the rest of the portfolio.

5. Design a layout

Once you have all of your writing samples selected and organized, you’ll need to think about how to best present your work in a way that’s visually appealing and on-brand with your particular style and tone. This is where the design of your portfolio comes in. When designing your portfolio, consider the following:

• Choose a format that’s creative yet easy to navigate. Whether creating a hardcopy portfolio or a website portfolio, you want to choose a format that aligns with your writing style and the context of your samples but also one that’s easy to navigate. Be creative but don’t let the design distract readers from your portfolio’s content. 
• Use a clear and readable font. Make sure that the font you choose is easy to read, both in print and digitally on the screen. It’s best to stick with very simple, legible fonts that won’t distract from your writing.
• Incorporate images or graphics. Consider adding visuals to your writing portfolio that capture the context of your work. Whether they’re symbolic photos or images that truly correspond with your samples, consider imagery that relates to your writing and engages your readers. Just be sure that they don’t detract from your copy.
• Keep it consistent. While you want your writing portfolio to be visually engaging, you also want to ensure that it’s professional and on point with your personal brand. Often, less is more. So, avoid using too many colors or fonts, and put together a design layout that’s consistent and aligned.

6. Summarize your work

Depending on the length of your writing portfolio, it can help to provide some context for your samples—especially if you can prove your worth with impressive stats. Similar to a novel’s blurb shown on the back cover of a book, these could be short summaries that introduce individual samples, case studies that outline your business results, or thematic sections of your portfolio that add color to your writer’s journey.

Writing short summaries or blurbs of your work gives readers a sense of what they can expect from each piece of writing. While not a requirement for writing portfolios, these blurbs can help guide the overarching story behind your experience. When writing these short summaries, consider the following elements:

• Overviews that summarize your work. You can include the genre, topic, purpose, brand, or writing style.
• Your intentions or goals. Break down the problem you solved with your writing pieces, like whether your objective was entertaining, educating, or persuading your readers, and who the project was for.
• The scope of the project and your role as a writer. Make sure you highlight whether your work was part of a larger publication or your own personal blog. Talk about timelines, titles, and how you contributed to any large-scale projects or group work.
• Any key performance indicators (KPIs). Hiring managers on marketing teams will be very interested in the results of your work, like how much traffic a piece earned, how much engagement it received, or how your work led to a particular business outcome.

7. Include your resume and contact info

When using your portfolio to land your dream job, including your resume (or a version of it) is a good supplement to showcase all your experience. You could include it at the beginning or end of your portfolio. In any case, it should be easy to find and relevant to your target audience.

You’ll also want to include a way for viewers to contact you, like your professional email address or social media account. Depending on the context of your portfolio, you may even consider adding a link to your LinkedIn or Instagram profile so employers can see more information about you and easily get in touch. If you print your portfolio, add links or QR codes to your professional website or digital portfolio, too.

Tips for creating a writing portfolio that wows

Now that you’re familiar with creating a writing portfolio, several additional points are worth calling out. These are general best practices and things to consider when bringing your portfolio to life.

Quality over quantity

Less is often more, as it’s generally better to showcase a small collection of high-quality writing samples rather than inundating your readers with numerous less-than-stellar pieces. Be selective with the work you choose, and aim for a diverse range that emphasizes your strengths and genres of focus.

Know your target audience

Identify your target audience for your writing portfolio, as this can help determine the specific writing samples you include and how you organize them. Keep in mind that you should tailor your portfolio to suit the needs of your potential clients or employers. Print on demand allows you to swap in and out samples that best align with each client or employer—or you can tailor your digital portfolio with specific landing pages for each application or industry.

Keep it clean, simple, and error-free

Your writing portfolio should be easy to navigate, visually appealing, and error-free. Use a simple design and make sure your writing samples are well-organized and clearly presented. Your portfolio’s overall design layout and format will help readers digest its contents. 

And since you’re a writer, typos are usually unforgivable. Get a friend or mentor (or both!) to proof your work before you send it out.

Create digital and print writing portfolios

There are many pros and cons for digital and hardcopy portfolio books. While having a digital writing portfolio might be needed for digital applications and remote positions, a print version will definitely have you standing out while attending in-person meetings and interviews. Ultimately, the decision should depend on your personal preference, the needs of your target audience, and your intended usage of the portfolio.

However, we’d suggest both. You’ll need digital samples to get through the initial stage of most applications, but few things are more impressive than a perfectly bound physical portfolio in face-to-face interactions.

Keep your writing portfolio up-to-date

Your writing should always be fresh and relevant, so don’t forget to regularly update the contents of your portfolio with new pieces or achievements. Also, it’s a great idea to tailor your portfolio for each interview. Doing this will help demonstrate your interest and commitment to the company or client.

What makes a strong writing portfolio?

Certain characteristics make for standout writing portfolios. Consider these five cornerstones of strong portfolios:

• Showcase the depth and diversity of your writing ability, including various genres and styles, to help demonstrate your versatility and range as a writer.
• Maintain consistency in your tone and presentation throughout your portfolio, even if you showcase work with different styles for different brands.
• Feature work most relevant to your primary target audience and the type of writing jobs you want to land in the future.
• Choose the most engaging writing samples that reflect your style and focus, highlighting your marketable attributes and unique skillset.
• Assemble your portfolio in a clear, cohesive, and organized manner, making it easy for readers to navigate and absorb your content.

Above all, remember that your writing portfolio reflects you and your abilities as a writer. Take the time to create something unique and memorable. We believe in you!

***

If you’re interested in creating a print version of your writing portfolio, Blurb offers the tools to make a professional, bookstore-quality portfolio book that will impress. 

Get started using a beautifully designed portfolio template, or create your own custom layout. Not only can you print as many books as you need on demand, but you can choose from a variety of formats, from large layflat portfolio books to smaller and more affordable options that make great leave-behinds.

The post How to create a writing portfolio appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Creating a comic book involves lucid worldbuilding, captivating plot and character development, and steady waves of disaster and triumph. In short order, comic book writing is an art form that not only creates stories but also actualizes them through a multifaceted creative toolkit—and further develops the stories through multi-media or a combination of the written word and book illustrations.

What makes a good comic book?

Some say it’s the art. Others insist it’s the storyline. Regardless, a comic book relies on visually-stimulating storytelling through an interplay of text and illustrations in sequential panels. As with traditional books, comic books are broken down into various formats and genres, including alternative/esoteric, science fiction, superhero, fantasy, horror, slice-of-life, and comedy.

Comic books provide a platform for limitless creativity and otherworldly ideas. In addition to creative storytelling, great comic books build strong plots backed by an original visual style and well-developed characters. An engaging comic also contains a visceral flow that brings the story to life.

Like all epic storytelling, exceptional comic books balance elements of conflict and tension along with relief and resolution. The best ideas for comic books produce stand-alone issues that also fit into a larger series or narrative and withstand the test of time. 

How to come up with ideas

As an aspiring comic book writer, there are several ways you can improve your ability to come up with ideas for your own writing. For starters, read more and read widely. Consume a variety of genres and eras to expose yourself to different storytelling techniques and ideas.

In addition to learning the basics of storytelling and how to structure a narrative, invest time developing your characters, empathizing with their emotions and motives, and creating exciting conflicts for them to overcome.

You might come up with comic book ideas in your day-to-day life, so it can help to carry a notebook or sketchbook to jot down ideas here and there. Your feelings, experiences, and interests will almost always give birth to your best ideas, so stay tuned to what stops you in your tracks or sparks your imagination.  

Inspirational examples of comic book writers

As part of reading widely to create your comic book ideas and writing style, take inspiration from some of these iconic comic writers in notable genres. 

• The 75-issue series Sandman by legendary storyteller Neil Gaiman is a comic literature phenomenon that combines horror, fantasy, and mythology. Sandman is considered a comic industry landmark that inspired the graphic novel genre.
• Written by American comic writer-artist Frank Miller, Sin City takes place in fictional Basin City, known as Sin City, to its inhabitants. The comic book follows the seedy Sin City residents, and the stories are told in a film noir-like style.
• Co-authored by Stan Lee and Jack Kirby, X-Men is a quintessential American superhero series published by Marvel Comics. The X-Men team consists of a rotating group of mutants born with superhuman abilities that are used to doing justice and good in the world.
• Alan Moore’s Watchmen is an unconventional superhero comic series that taps into themes of power, justice, morality, and identity. The story investigates a mysterious murder and uses non-linear storytelling, making for a gripping read.
• The graphic novel Maus shares a unique narrative of the Holocaust through animal characters. Written by Art Spiegelman, Maus is a Pulitzer Prize-winning example of how comic books can be vehicles for literary expression and symbolism.
• The Walking Dead series by Robert Kirkman is a fan-favorite horror series that tracks a diverse group of post-apocalyptic survivors navigating a world overtaken by zombies.

44 comic book ideas to kick-start your imagination

Need some inspiration or thought-starters for your comic book? Explore this extensive list of comic book ideas and storylines broken down by genre.

Fantasy and science fiction ideas

1. In a post-apocalyptic world overrun by robots, small habitats of humans scheme together to reclaim their world and dismantle the robotic empire that’s evolved.

2. A few friends discover a portal to a parallel fantasy world. When they return, they share incredible accounts of a blissful utopia that soon becomes the center of obsession and secrecy.

3. In a futuristic world of space exploration, a planet’s military is recruited to fend off an alien invasion threatening a neighboring solar system.

4. As AI develops self-awareness and starts questioning its existence and purpose, it secretly hacks and takes over confidential computer systems and networks, including control over governments’ nuclear missiles.

5. A group of time travelers from multiple historical points comes together to prevent a mysterious force from unraveling the fabric of time and all forms of civilization.

6. In a post-cataclysmic world where traces of humanity survive the harsh environmental conditions, Mad Max-like gangs and crime run rampant, and conflict is ever present.

7. As climate change eventually makes most of Earth uninhabitable, the human race builds small colonies that face persisting struggles and conflicts to survive.

8. A group of high school students discovers that they’re reincarnated warriors of ancient civilizations who band together to save the world from peril against an ancient evil.

9. A young wizard inherits special powers that are later relied upon in combating an evil onslaught of black magic and fierce creatures who infiltrate the peaceful world.

Horror ideas

10. A haunted asylum where the patients were once subjected to horrific experiments reopens, and the ghosts of those patients haunt the new staff.

11. A group of college friends moves into a home together for their senior year but soon discovers that it’s haunted by the vengeful spirits of the home’s previous occupants.

12. Zombies from an experiment gone wrong overrun a small town, forcing a dwindling community of survivors to unite and fight for survival while uncovering the outbreak’s source.

13. A series of child disappearances peril a small town, and it’s eventually discovered that the cause is a shapeshifting metamorphic figure with demonic features.

14. An archaeologist comes across an ancient tomb, unleashing a powerful mummy curse that brings to life the dead mummies buried in the entire labyrinth.

15. While on a camping trip, several friends in the woods stumble upon an ancient witchcraft evil that preys on its victims’ fears and secrets.

16. A local detective must solve a series of ritualistic murders that appear to be connected to a secret group notorious for practicing dark magic.

17. A small community is plagued by bizarre and gruesome murders that point to an old mansion with a history of tension and paranormal activity.

18. While out on a hike, a group of friends witnesses a murder that quickly escalates into an intense thriller of panic, terror, and escape to survive.  

Alternative and esoteric ideas

19. A teenager with acute telepathic capabilities delves deeply into the world of the psyche, bringing to the surface repressed memories and hidden desires of those around them.

20. A group of LGBTQ+ students bands together to counteract the discrimination and prejudice they face in their local community.

21. A woman discovers her powerful abilities to channel spiritual healing energy and uses her newfound powers to cure illnesses. However, her healing abilities soon attract the interest of big pharma’s dark side.

22. A graphic novel series exploring the struggles and setbacks of people living in poverty and surviving amid highly hostile conditions.

23. Students of philosophy and alchemy develop the ability to manipulate matter and energy through their understanding of an ancient occult tradition.

24. A reclusive scientist uncovers a way to see his consciousness expanded into the astral plane, where he encounters supernatural beings and alternate dimensions of reality beyond his wildest imagination.

25. Native tribes unravel a direct connection to their ancient ancestral lineage by exploring a series of mystical experiences and unveiling visions.

26. A cosmic being that controls the flow of time must transcend past and future versions of itself to prevent a catastrophic paradox.

27. A young woman who can access and manipulate people’s dreams while they’re asleep inadvertently creates her nightmare reality.

Slice of life

28. A coming-of-age comic book idea about a teenager who navigates the emotional rollercoaster of high school, including relationships, family, friendships, and finding their place in the world.

29. As their children leave home for college, a couple in their late fifties embrace a new lifestyle as “empty nesters” that involves travel, adventure, and a newfound enthusiasm for life.

30. A heartfelt story that taps into the simple pleasures and hardships of family life on a rural farm, including the dynamics between parents and children, environmental challenges, and making an honest living.

31. A man in his mid-30s, unhappy pushing paper in an office, takes the plunge toward a radical career shift that involves relocating to a foreign country.

32. A lonesome watercolorist makes an artistic breakthrough that involves both triumph and struggle as they try to succeed in the niche world of painting.

33. Just after graduating high school, a shy student embraces college life’s social stresses and challenges, like making new friends, taking challenging courses, and figuring out their future career path.

34. A story that explores the lives of an elderly group of friends who attempt to get the most out of life during their later years by planning a radical bucket list of obscure activities.

35. A comic series that chronicles the lives of a few neighbors in a small town who navigate relationship dynamics, emotional struggles, and tension of living in a tight-knit community.

36. A slice-of-life comic about a group of coworkers who face unique challenges in navigating the modern corporate workplace, from dealing with office politics and drama to balancing personal and work-life woes.

Comedy

37. A comedy series about a lowlife slacker who is content coasting through life but unexpectedly encounters myriad strange and hilarious events that slowly transform their outlook.

38. A small group of friends orchestrates some of the most elaborate pranks on their school’s faculty, leading to unexpected consequences and hilarious mischief.

39. After his wife’s passing, a man explores a new yet awkward social life of weird first dates, unfamiliar activities, and questionably-successful attempts at trying new things.

40. A workplace comedy about the daily antics, hijinks, and escapades of a few unique employee personalities working for a company in an unusual industry.

41. A parody that makes fun of popular TV shows, movies, or comic books, adding a hilarious twist to the conventions and cliches of their inherent genres.

42. Improv comics at a local theater are granted an opportunity to create a new platform to share new material and out-of-the-box comedy to revive dying venues in their community.

43. A group of ambitious culinary enthusiasts navigates the challenges of running their restaurant, from dealing with demanding customers to managing the complexities of the food industry.

44. A sitcom-like comic book idea about a diverse group of friends and their wacky, relatable romps as they experience the ups and downs of living in a big city.

Bring your comic book ideas to life

Blurb makes it easy to turn your comic book ideas into a finished product. Leverage a full suite of bookmaking tools, design templates, and publishing services to bring your ideas to life. With Blurb, you can also take advantage of distribution and selling platforms like Amazon and Barnes & Noble to promote your book to the world. 

Are you ready to get started? Learn more by exploring our comic book maker and other examples of graphic novels. Check out our bookstore’s comics and graphic novels section for more inspiration.

The post 44 comic book ideas and examples to get you started appeared first on Blurb Blog.

When you know what readers (and reviewers) expect of your book, you’ll have what you need to decide your tone, style, content, format, and even length and price point. Correctly selecting your genre is also critical when marketing your book—you need to know where your book fits in the existing market and who will be interested in reading it.

Today, there are literally thousands of book genres listed on Amazon, including continuously emerging new categories and perpetually evolving legacy genres and sub-genres. But don’t worry. We’re breaking down the most popular book genres so you can hone in on which might be perfect for you.

What is a book genre?

At the most basic level, a book genre is a category of books. Writers and readers have been grouping books by genre since the beginning of written literature, usually based on similarities in plot, structure, characters, narrative devices, and other elements that draw readers into the story.

For readers, genres provide context into what to expect from a particular novel or book, helping them discover books that best align with their interests and curiosities. And for authors, as mentioned above, book genres provide a framework for producing and marketing your work.

Genres may be as broad as romance or as specific as queer Gothic horror. But no matter the genre, they’re all initially segmented into two very general categories: fiction and nonfiction. From there, books get dialed into many more categories—mystery, fantasy, romance, science fiction, self-help, memoir, autobiographies, and children’s books. In addition, many book genres include subgenres that further specify the category and may overlap. 

Let’s dive into the most popular book genres and how to define each.

Popular fiction genres

Fiction comes from the author’s imagination—rather than actual events, facts, or people. From horror to graphic novels, fiction writing can take many shapes. They can occur in the present, past, or future and include fantastical or realistic settings. While fiction authors usually intend to entertain, you can also use this creative book genre to explore multifaceted themes and complex ideas.

1. Romance

Widely known as one of the bestselling book genres, romance novels center on passionate, romantic relationships between characters. Romance has been around for centuries, tracing its origins back to medieval literature and blooming in the 18th and 19th centuries. Romance usually explores themes like love, passion, and commitment—but the genre can overlap with others like fantasy, thrillers, and poetry.

Romance is right for you if you want to write about the inner emotional life of characters, share a rollercoaster of tension and conflict, and provide a satisfying resolution (or cliffhanger!). Some of the world’s most popular romance authors include Nora Roberts, Jane Austen, and Nicholas Sparks. When readers pick up a romance novel, they can expect to read about the ups and downs of romantic relationships and the journey to find true love.

Don’t forget to explore its many subgenres: historical romance, young adult (YA) romance, erotic romance, and romantic suspense, to name a few that usually top the charts.

2. Fantasy

This genre is shaped by mystical and otherworldly settings that are often very different from our reality. The fantasy genre has its roots in ancient mythology and legend, often emphasizing magical or supernatural themes. Like romance, it also took root in the 18th century and remains a popular fiction book genre to this day. 

If you love world-building, imaginative settings, a sense of wonder, magic, and elaborately-detailed stories—look no further. Famous fantasy authors include Howl’s Moving Castle‘s Diana Wynne Jones and Lord of the Rings’ J.R.R. Tolkien. Fantasy is a genre that has no limits to creative storytelling. Readers can be transported to a world of wonder and taken on a journey of adventure, utopia, and discovery.

3. Science fiction

Sometimes overlapping with fantasy, sci-fi takes readers to worlds with unrecognizable technologies and new scientific discoveries. It’s a genre that came into its own in the 19th century, with H.G. Wells and Jules Verne making their names as its defining sci-fi authors. 

Science fiction books usually feature advanced technology with a focus on real (or real-ish) science. So when readers pick up your science fiction book, they’ll expect to be transported to a place where they can explore the possibilities and implications of a new technological landscape or interplanetary setting. Some of the most popular science fiction authors include Neal Stephenson of Snow Crash and Isaac Asimov of I, Robot.

4. Horror

Horror is an especially popular book genre that aims to elicit the reader’s fear, anticipation, and dread by using supernatural characters, paranormal elements, and psychological terror. With roots as far back as ancient Greece, the horror genre has shocked audiences for centuries and is ripe with folklore and legends. 

When writing horror, you’ll want to emphasize anguish, shock, and the unknown—plus a healthy dose of suspense. Some famous horror authors include Stephen King, Dean Koontz, and H.P. Lovecraft, all of whom are experts in building dread over hundreds of pages. Readers who engage in a good horror novel can expect an unpredictable and terrifying journey into an author’s dark world.

5. Thriller

Thrillers are a popular genre characterized by their fast-paced, high-stakes plots, often rooted in adventure, crime, and espionage. This genre gained popularity over the past few decades, with origins dating to the crime novels of the early 20th century. 

Key elements of a thriller include suspense, unpredictability, and a sense of urgency and danger. To write an excellent thriller, you’ll need to develop a strong protagonist, a believable villain, twists and turns, plus plenty of clues to help the reader along. Thrillers often cross over into other book genres, like mysteries, horrors, and fantasies—so don’t be afraid to mix and match. Before you begin, read a few novels by the most popular authors in the thriller genre: Dan Brown, John Grisham, and James Patterson. Check out up-and-coming authors like Zakiya Dalila Harris and Megan Giddings too.

6. Short story

This format-based genre condenses the classic fiction story by focusing on just a couple of main characters, a primary setting, or a single idea. A short story can be as concise as a couple of pages or upwards of 10,000 words. Much longer than that, and you’re into novella territory.

While this genre has been around for centuries, some of the first famed short story writers in Western literature include Ernest Hemingway, Edgar Allan Poe, and Nathaniel Hawthorne. To see how the genre has evolved, check out the inspiring work of contemporary short story authors like Alice Munro, Raymond Carver, and George Saunders.  

Short stories are often published and gathered into collections of a single author or on a single topic. When readers pick up a collection of short stories, they can expect a variety of stories that focus on different characters, settings, and themes. Short stories may be more manageable for you if you’re a new author and allow you to explore your voice via multiple genres, characters, or themes.

7. Young adult (YA)

Young adult is a popular, audience-centered genre geared primarily towards teenagers. YA books often emphasize themes and issues relevant to younger readers, like self-discovery and coming-of-age stories. YA also often overlaps with related genres like romance, fantasy, and self-help—so you don’t have to feel limited by this genre. 

YA has exponentially grown in the past decade—it may even be the fastest-growing fiction category—with authors like John Green and Stephenie Meyer tapping into this cultural phenomenon. Elements of YA literature include relatable characters and topics, personal growth and growing up, and issues like first love, fitting in, and finding oneself.

What’s more, a whole host of adults love to read YA novels, so your target audience is not limited to young people. This genre could be perfect for you if you love centering powerful stories of adolescents as they grapple with angst and come into their own.

8. Mystery

The mystery genre is another popular category that involves a crime, conundrum, or puzzle that the reader deciphers alongside the story’s main characters. Often overlapping with thriller, the mystery genre has a long history dating back to the 19th century. Edgar Allan Poe is often credited as one of the earliest mystery writers after producing the first detective story, “The Murders in the Rue Morgue,” in 1841.

Core components that define the mystery genre include a whodunit scenario of clues, questions, and riddles that revolve around a detective or amateur sleuth working to solve a suspenseful crime or incident. If you choose this genre, you’ll follow in the footsteps of famous mystery authors, including Agatha Christie, Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, and Michael Connelly. 

Just be sure you’re doing plenty of research on your sub-genre (like cozy mystery or noir detective novel), crime tactics, and setting. Not to mention how to build that much-needed tension and drop clues at the right moment.

9. Children’s literature

Children’s books are intended for younger audiences and are typically broken into age categories: board books (0- to 3-year-olds), picture books (4- to 6-year-olds), early readers (5- to 8-year-olds), chapter books (6 to 10-year-olds), and middle-grade fiction (8- to 12-year-olds). You’ll want to use age-appropriate language and plot themes to align with your intended audience’s abilities and needs. 

Children’s literature has a long history dating back to the 1400s. Prominent authors in this genre include Lewis Carroll, A.A. Milne, Roald Dahl, and Eric Carle. Depending on the children’s book, readers can be taken on a journey, explore and learn new concepts, or revel in illustrations that bring the story to life.

Ready to write one? Check out our blog: how to start writing a children’s book.

10. Comics and graphic novels

More format than genre, comic books and graphic novels are visual storytelling mediums less than a century old. They often combine elements of traditional literature with illustrations, panels, and other graphical content. To succeed in this format, you’ll need to combine words and imagery to make your stories stand out.

The comic book is known for its wide range of themes, from superhero thrillers and mysteries to humor and slice-of-life dramas. It’s also seen as highly influential in its cultural impact, with many comic books turning into blockbuster successes. While similar to comic books, graphic novels differ in that they’re complete book-length stories. Comic books, on the other hand, are shorter and serialized.

To see if this visual format is right for you, explore the work of the greats like Ta-Nehisi Coates, Ellen Forney, Stan Lee, and Scott Adams. Then get writing and sketching. This format lends itself to nearly any genre that a non-comic book can, so feel free to use more than just superheroes and villains to build out your work.

11. Poetry

This genre is imaginative, employing rhythm, imagery, and figurative language to evoke emotion, paint a picture, or convey a message. It has a profound history extending as far back as thousands of years BCE. Homer and William Shakespeare were among some of the earliest genre-defining poetry writers.

Writing a poetry book can take many shapes, including sonnets, haikus, free verse, and more. Vital elements of poetry include rhythm, rhyme, and imagery—in fact, poets have created the first written examples of alliteration, simile, hyperbole, and many other figures of speech. Some of the most notable modern poets are Robert Frost, Maya Angelou, and Langston Hughes.

Popular nonfiction genres

Unlike fiction, where authors write stories based on imagination, nonfiction is a genre based on actual events, facts, or people. A nonfiction book can be an autobiography, memoir, travel guide, self-help book, cookbook, or even handbook. 

Nonfiction books aim to inform, educate, or persuade readers about a particular subject or real-life experience. Nonfiction books like photo books, instruction manuals, and textbooks are also used as learning resources or research references. The possibilities are endless!

1. Biography

As the quintessential nonfiction genre, biographies capture the life story of a famous person like a celebrity, scientist, political leader, or artist. Unlike memoirs and autobiographies, which are generally written in first-person and are self-described personal accounts, you’ll have to write about someone else to pen a biography. 

Biographies usually include stories about the subject’s upbringing, education, career, personal development, and legacy. They can consist of interviews, research, photos, and documents that capture an in-depth look at the person’s life. Some of the most compelling recent biographies include Steve Jobs by Walter Isaacson, Cleopatra: A Life by Stacy Schiff, and The Snowball: Warren Buffett and the Business of Life by Alice Schroeder.

If you’re looking for a genre that can allow you to capture the life story of someone you can’t learn enough about, then biography is likely the right choice for you. It’ll allow you plenty of opportunity to research your subject so you can craft an accurate portrayal. 

2. Memoir

Memoirs, a book written about your recollections, are popular among self-published authors. You can focus your memoir on specific events or periods of life—or document meaningful memories for future generations to enjoy. That’s the beauty of memoirs, as anyone can write them, not just famous people. 

Authors usually write memoirs to capture a gripping tale of their life, like a war experience, a successful career, or a personal story of redemption. Critical elements of a memoir include personal reflection, first-person storytelling, and anecdotes. Some popular memoirists include Maya Angelou, Anne Frank, Ernest Hemingway, and Joan Didion. 

Readers pick up this genre to see their story reflected back or uncover life experiences they could never have imagined. 

3. Self-help

Also referred to as personal development, the self-help genre aims to empower readers to improve aspects of their lives, be it personal, professional, or spiritual. Self-help books often provide practical advice, case studies, and the author’s own anecdotes to guide readers along their journey. 

The self-help genre’s popularity has exploded over the past couple of decades. Some of the most notable books in this genre include The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People by Stephen Covey, You Are a Badass by Jen Sincero, and The Power of Now by Eckhart Tolle. 

Write a self-help book if you have personal experience changing your life—or if you’re an expert in a niche topic, whether that’s fighting addiction or combatting writer’s block.

4. Art and photography

Self-publishing an art or photography book is the perfect format to share your vision with a wide audience while retaining complete creative control. This vast genre includes everything from art monographs to anthologies of photographs and filmmaking guides to ceramic portfolios.

While this genre covers a wide range of creative expressions, photography is one of the most popular subgenres. If you’re looking for inspiration, look no further than the great photo books by Ansel Adams, Annie Leibovitz, Robert Frank, and Henri Cartier-Bresson.

We believe strongly in this genre. In fact, Blurb was founded in 2006 by photographer and start-up CEO Eileen Gittins to address a need for a simple, affordable way for people to publish their own photo books.

5. History

History is a popular book genre, providing readers with an account of past events and often overlapping with biography, science, and pop culture. Given the massive number of history books, we divide the category into subgenres, like political history, military history, and queer history. 

Of course, we can trace historical documentation to ancient civilizations that recorded chronicles and annals of prior events. Today, historical books recount past events and people—often focusing on a particular period or person of interest. These books can be educational, entertaining, or both.

If you’re planning on writing historical nonfiction, you’ll want to start with research and provide readers with the context surrounding your topic and the limitations of your sources. A couple of today’s most popular history books include A Brief History of Time by Stephen Hawking and Stamped from the Beginning by Ibram X. Kendi.

6. Travel

Sometimes written as memoir or historical nonfiction, the travel genre describes an author’s experiences in a particular place. Books that fall in this genre have been popular for centuries, with authors like Mark Twain and Ernest Hemingway among the trailblazing travel writers of the past century. The travel genre has stood the test of time with wildly popular books like Eat, Pray, Love by Elizabeth Gilbert and Wild: From Lost to Found on the Pacific Crest Trail by Cheryl Strayed. 

Travel writing aims to provide a sense of place, culture, and personal experience by capturing the landscape, feeling, and action that makes up the setting. Readers who engage in a good travel book are transported to unique places and cultures and learn and explore through the author’s own accounts. That could be you!

7. Pop culture

Often a mix of history, biography, and art, the pop culture genre covers a wide range of topics related to popular music, film, television, and radio. Pop culture also includes cultural moments, like the Roaring Twenties and the counterculture hippie movement of the 60s. Like most good nonfiction, the components that make for gripping pop culture books center on relevant research, expert analysis, and historical storytelling. So if you’re a student of social phenomenon, this might be the genre for you.

There are a multitude of iconic pop culture books, but a few worth noting are Rebels on the Backlot by Sharon Waxman, Freakonomics by Steven Levitt, and The Republic of Rock by Kevin J. H. Dettmar.  

8. Cookbooks

Cookbooks have become a boon for self-published authors and culinary creatives looking to document their work. The genre covers culturally-inspired recipes, cooking techniques, and chef memoirs (with recipes thrown in). 

Cookbooks date back to 1700 BCE in ancient Mesopotamia. But it wasn’t until the 14th century that kings and nobles started recording recipes and food preparations. Some cookbooks that remain popular today include Mastering the Art of French Cooking by Julia Child, The Joy of Cooking by Irma S. Rombauer, and How to Cook Everything by Mark Bittman. 

While professional chefs and food bloggers make up the lion’s share of cookbook writers, self-published cookbooks are popular for those who’d like a creative record of their recipes. If you’re considering making a cookbook, brush up on your food photography and note how others guide readers with clear instructions. 

9. Health and fitness

Another genre that hasn’t stopped trending in recent decades is health and fitness, which crosses over into science and self-help. These books frequently center nutrition, mental health, exercise, training, and personal development. The pillars of good health and wellness books are scientific research, subject matter expertise, case studies, and personal accounts. 

Some popular health and wellness authors include T. Colin Campbell, Aviva Romm, Timothy Ferriss, and Gretchen Rubin. While some books in this genre are expansive reads, like Ferriss’s The 4-Hour Body, most books in this category are highly niche and subject-specific, like Romm’s The Adrenal Thyroid Revolution.

10. Science

Our last best-selling nonfiction genre covers a full spectrum of topics and subgenres, like technology, physics, chemistry, biology, medicine, and even politics and business. Science books seek to educate readers on complex concepts in a way that’s accessible, digestible, and informative.

Like most nonfiction, the foundations of excellent scientific books are in-depth research and expert analysis. Some of the most popular science books include The Double Helix by James Watson, Sapiens by Yuval Noah Harari, and The Selfish Gene by Richard Dawkins. 

What are the bestselling book genres?

Bestselling book genres vary by region, culture, and era. We’ve listed many of the hottest genres of today—but the bestsellers from the last few decades have nearly always included science fiction, fantasy, romance novels, biographies, and self-help books. 

Based on a combination of Amazon’s Best Sellers list and other industry publications, the most popular and bestselling book genres fall into the following categories:

• Fantasy, science fiction, and dystopian fiction
• Mystery, thrillers, horror, and true crime
• Autobiography, biography, and memoir
• Art and photography
• Romance, relationships, sexuality, and LBGTQ+
• Self-help, personal development, and spirituality
• Adventure, travel, inspiration, and motivation
• Health and wellness, diet and nutrition, and fitness
• Children’s fiction

Explore a variety of book genres as an author and reader

While it’s good to know what types of books you love the most, it’s equally important to recognize the benefits of exploring genre diversity. Especially as a reader, engaging in multiple genres can broaden your horizons, enhance your creative thinking, and improve your writing skills. 

As an author, carving a niche and concentrating on specific genres can strengthen your credibility, authority, and thought leadership on a given topic. But for most self-publishing authors and creatives, newfound ingenuity can come from trying alternative genres and formats, whether you’re expanding into your first photo book, cookbook, or memoir. The increased accessibility of low-cost self-publishing options makes this even more possible. 

We can’t wait to see what you create!

***

By the way, Blurb makes it easy to create and self-publish a book. Test out our book formats and design tools to make your next book. Then, use Blurb’s book-selling platform to list your book on sites like Amazon and Barnes & Noble. Blurb can help bring your unique book to life, whether the genre is a short business book or a haunting biography.

Are you ready to self-publish your book? Get started today!

The post Popular book genres to inspire your next book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

1. Political persuasion

The zine’s beginnings can span back in time to pamphlets like Thomas Paine’s Common Sense in 1775. His 47-page piece of prose encouraged ordinary colonists to fight for independence and started the revolution—who knows what yours might do.

Why not try to create a persuasive political print argument of your own?

2. Black activist “little magazines”

Amid the Harlem Renaissance, a group of notable Black activists and authors gathered to create Fire, an influential literary magazine dedicated to spreading Black thought. This led to a proliferation of “little magazines” by other Black authors.

Continue the tradition with a little magazine of your own.

3. Sci-fi fanzine

The first time zines came to be known as zines was in the 1930s when “fan magazines” (shortened to “fanzine” and then “zine”) ran rampant. Famed authors like Ray Bradbury joined in the movement of small-run prints.

Follow in their footsteps by creating an intergalactic romance from your most cherished sci-fi book or an ode to your favorite sci-fi show.

4. Queer community building

In June 1947, Edythe Eyde typed out the first volume of Vice Versa, which she called “America’s Gayest Magazine.” While today there are far more avenues for LGBTQ+ ideas to spread, the zine remains an essential method of communication with small communities.

There’s no reason not to take after Edythe and mail or hand-deliver your queer declaration to friends.

5. Poetic license

Alongside the sci-fi and literary works of the 30s, 40s, and 50s came poetry zines—from collectives of niche artists that wanted to share their work but couldn’t access the traditional publishing methods. Printed with a mimeograph machine, producing copies by forcing ink through a stencil, they could print and distribute only 100 or so zines.

Create your short poetry collection—include all the work a traditional publisher would never print.

6. Seriously terrifying horror

Off the back of the sci-fi fanzine movement came creepy-crawly horror zines. With titles like Gore Creatures, Cinemacabre, and Black Oracle to draw inspiration from, there’s no end to the spooky creations you can create yourself.

Draw from your worst nightmares to create a horror piece made for a super short zine.

7. Underground art

During the 60s and 70s, art and literary zines spread through niche networks—aiming to share art the commercial art world refused to publish. Groups of artists, or single artists alone, turned their works into short prints to share.

We’re ready to see your collection of your weirdest friends’ weirdest art and illustrations.

8. Rock prozine

Sci-fi and comic zine creators in the 60s realized they shared an interest in rock music. Thus the music zine came to be. Most famous was a zine turned prozine turned magazine named Crawdaddy! One 17-year-old Swarthmore College student turned a collection of his own rock and roll criticisms into a mass-market magazine.

What’s stopping you from sharing your own opinions of your favorite artists?

9. Punk DIY

From the rock zine came the punk zine. In the late 70s and 80s, the grungy, DIY ethos of this iteration of the zine covered iconic bands like The Clash and The Ramones. The genre aesthetic took a turn with the increasing accessibility of copy machines and home printing tech—meaning scissors, glue, and xeroxing became the name of the game.

Go back to the punk roots with handwritten text and rough and ready comics (maybe even using pilfered sharpies).

10. Riot grrrl ruckus

A decade later, riot grrrls burst onto the scene, challenging the sexism in punk with its female empowerment values. The feminist practice of sharing personal experiences to build community meant that bands shared not only music but also musician-created zines.

Take a page from Bikini Kill’s book and take your band to the written page—with a healthy splash of women’s rights and revolutionary rage.

11. Graphic and comic zines

Throughout the century, zines spread to other countries, including a proliferation of Mexican comic books and graphic novels in the 2000s. The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill’s Mexican Comic Collection and La Maleta Fanzinera both have tons of excellent examples.

Try your hand at a visual zine by illustrating your work.

12. Webzines turned print

The rise of the internet also meant a decline in zines. Some print publications made the jump to webzine, like Boing Boing. But much of the effort that would-be zinesters put into their art went into blogs, online journals, and (now) social media. Go in reverse and transform your blog, journal, or social media account into zine form.

What would your Instagram feed look like if it were a DIY print piece?

13. Mamazine

You’ve seen the mothering blogs with their (sometimes harsh) opinions, the parenting magazines with their (always endless) advertising. Well, here’s what every parent really needs: a simple, judgment-free and ad-free guide to carrying, birthing, and raising kids. Check out East Village Inky for an idea of what we’re talking about.

What do you have to show and tell about the experience of parenthood?

14. Travelogue

We like to think the travel zine came about to eradicate having to sit through the painstaking slideshows of someone else’s vacation. Booooring. Instead, travel zines become two-dimensional storytellers in photos and words. Take a page from this author about a sailing trip she took with her family in Greece.

What made your last adventure most memorable? Why not make an issue out of it?

15. Oddities zine

Humans all have their idiosyncrasies, and there’s no better way to share your love of taxidermy, seeing faces in random objects, or explaining the finer points of building your self-playing saxophone than by making an oddities zine.

Think it’s weird? Exactly the point. What makes you unique?

16. Chapters in mental health

Sometimes you can’t explain your thoughts and feelings, but it helps when you hear stories or see art that others have made to express themselves during hard times. Lina Wu’s 40-page zine For Girls Who Cry Often is a perfect example.

Check out more zines like hers. Use them as inspiration to make your own—for you or someone else.

17. Foodie and drinkie zine

Chinese Protest Recipes? A zine that’s part memoir and part menu? A title that introduces an entirely new word to your vocabulary: Chewn? They’re not just recipe books. These have all the ingredients—art, musings, content—of a well-balanced zine.

What topics would you like others to chew on and say cheers to over a shared meal?

18. Hand-lettering lovers

A simple phrase about life may be nothing on its own, but once you pack it with the power of hand lettering, it becomes a statement piece. Zines are confrontational in nature, thanks largely to alphabetic art. We’re especially inspired by artist Isabel Urbina Peña’s work.

If fonts are your love language, consider making your own—and making it into a zine.

19. Literary zines

Zines are often known for art. But don’t forget the art of the written word. We’ve all heard, “The pen is mightier than the sword.” Nowhere is this more true than in the world of literary zines. Fiction, essays, poetry, lyrics, manifestos: these are the hallmarks of self-publishing life.

Consider a few writing prompts and let your imagination take to the page.

20. Astrology vignettes

Imagine the volumes and issues of different stars aligning. What’s marriage like between a Gemini and Pisces? What if they have a Scorpio child? If you have the gift of fortune-telling or card reading, you could make your gift into a zine (heck, and a business!).

Tell the tale of your romance in a zine that maps the moons and the stars that brought you together.

21. Kid manifesto

Kids may be shy to speak their feelings, but chances are, they have a lot to say. Whereas some people make photo books for each year of a kid’s life, there’s also a lot to be said for encouraging them to make a zine of what’s going on inside their hearts and minds.

Challenge a kid you know to express something they feel strongly about through writings and pictures.

22. Petzine

The proper way to feed chinchillas? Everything you ever wanted to know about the ball python? For exotic pets, zines make excellent how-to guides that can be artfully told. The trick is to make it unique and unlike a regular handbook. Perhaps make it into a comic-book-style story. Or build top 10 lists of various topics—best names, coolest tricks, weirdest habits.

Is your pet zine-worthy? “Umm…yes,” they’d say if they could talk.

23. Tattoo mini-memoir

Tattoos were once the art of rebels only. Today they’re much more mainstream, but there’s still a story behind each and every one. Early tattoo artists put their work in handy zines for admiring and attracting clients—a portfolio of sorts.

What’s your ink have to say?

24. Interviews and musings

We love that author and artist Hannah Hightman interviewed all her heroes and made them into a zine that’s the perfect blend of artful punk and high school.

Who are the influencers that would make your interview list?

Creating a zine is a fantastic way to express yourself and share your ideas with others. Whether you follow in the footsteps of politicians, punks, or poets, there’s a zine idea for everyone. With some creativity and elbow grease, you can create a one-of-a-kind zine that’s sure to stand out from the rest.

So what are you waiting for? Create your zine today.

The post 24 Zine ideas to spark your DIY creativity appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Final part of the series on how to print your photo book with pro photographer Jared Platt

Editor’s note: In this three-part series, pro photographer and educator Jared Platt will teach you to create high-quality photo books with Blurb. Jared will take you step-by-step through picking your photos, using the top bookmaking tools, and printing your end product. Want to see the entire tutorial? Visit Jared Platt’s website!

Welcome back to class. I’m Jared Platt, a professional photographer and instructor who’s here to take you from photos to self-published photo book. In this last lesson, I’ll teach you how to get from a fantastic selection of pictures to a designed and printed photo book.

Remember, we’ve already learned why we should print a photo book and how to pick our photos. We’re moving on to the fun part: layout and actually getting a book printed!

What do you need to design a book?

Now that you have a collection of images (even a loose collection) and a general sense of how you want to present your ideas, it’s time to get into the design.

There are a few different ways to approach book design: You can use a template that someone else has already created to drag and drop your images, create your own layout in a graphic design program, or hire a professional designer.

We’ll focus on the first two options, as they give you more control over your book’s final look and feel. Both rely on software to design the layout of your book.

Book design software

Three programs will do an excellent job building your book (and will automatically upload to Blurb for super easy, on-demand publication). You can choose between Blurb BookWright, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic, and Adobe InDesign.

• Blurb BookWright is a free, intuitive program that can auto-flow your photos into pre-built, professionally-designed templates. Powerful enough to create your own layout and comfortably design text-heavy books, it makes book creation easy for photographers with any level of graphic design skills.
• Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic is uncomplicated to use—and makes editing images directly inside your book design really easy. In fact, I don’t think there’s any reason to look elsewhere if you already use Lightroom Classic.
• Adobe InDesign is the gold standard for page layout. It’s a professional-level program that offers flexibility and control when designing books (and other types of print media).

So how do you choose? We’ll get into it below.

BookWright, Lightroom Classic, or InDesign: How to pick

All three of these bookmaking programs can create a beautiful book design and quickly get sent to print—whether you use Blurb or not. However, there are some key differences that will help you choose the right program based on your skill level and book project requirements.

Since you are in my class, I’ll also offer my suggestions. If you have more text in your book (or don’t own Lightroom Classic), then BookWright is your best option. If your book doesn’t have a lot of text, Lightroom Classic is your best bet. Unless, of course, you already know InDesign (then use it!).

BookWright: a free program for text-heavy books

BookWright is an excellent program if you’re looking for a simple way to create a text-heavy book without learning graphic design or paying for a program. It’s easy to use, completely free, and quite powerful.

In fact, it has many simple functions for organizing images—just like Lightroom Classic. And it has a far easier text editing environment. So if I am designing a book with entire pages of text, I will choose BookWright over Lightroom Classic every time.

Also, since you can rely on a variety of templates and automatic input of your photos, it’s perfect for first-time bookmakers or those who want to focus on the writing and story more than the design.

The downside to BookWright is that you need to export your final images into the program. That means you have extra copies of your images, and also, if you need to change any, you’ll have to go back to your original photo and then re-export them. 

However, you’ll get that time back with the time savings from the improved text editing environment. The shape tool also allows you to add subtle graphic elements to the book’s design, which is a plus.

Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Classic: hyper-efficient photo editing and book design

Lightroom Classic is one of my favorite programs. It’s an efficient photo editor that can do a lot—and it’s also great for book design.

The program’s Book module already has Blurb built-in for hyper-fast printing post-design. It’s effortless to use, and my favorite feature is that I can create a book using only RAW photographs. So if I make the book design in Lightroom Classic, I can modify any of the pictures right there, and they will be automatically updated in the book design.

You can also design the book in Lightroom Classic on a plane (or anywhere offline) while the actual photos are sitting at home on a large hard drive. So you don’t need to collect the images first, export them, and then import them into another program to finish a book design. That’s what makes Lightroom Classic a convenient and efficient tool for designing books.

It does have two shortcomings. First, it is not simple to work with text. Although the text editor has the same text controls as InDesign, it is cumbersome and clunky to work with text in the book module. Second, there are limited paper and products available in Lightroom Classic’s Book module. But, if the available products work for your project and you have a design with a limited amount of text, it is the most efficient way to design your photo book.

Adobe InDesign: best for professionals who already know it

Adobe InDesign is unquestionably the premier program for page layout design. If you already know the program, it is very powerful and can create anything. Professional photographers, book designers, and magazine editors all use InDesign. In fact, I use it anytime I am designing something that needs an extremely fine touch—especially something that will have a lot of text, like a magazine or a how-to photo book.

You can add photos, text, vectors, and even video thumbnails to an InDesign document. It is similar to BookWright in almost every way, just more powerful (and more complicated).

The downside is just that—it is a highly complex program to learn. In fact, if you don’t know how to use it already, you probably don’t want to learn how to use it. (And that’s why I’m not offering a tutorial in this class.)

Design your book in two steps

Don’t get nervous now and stop now. Keep going! You have nothing to lose.

You don’t even have to order your book in the end. But starting your book will allow you the experience of layout images in relation to one another—and adding in words that go along. There is a lot of education in this process. So get started.

1. Calibrate your monitor

If you haven’t calibrated your monitor, it doesn’t matter how much you spent on it or how nice it is. Without this crucial step, you simply can’t trust the color, contrast, or brightness you see on screen.

If you are editing your images on a non-calibrated monitor, they might look perfect on your display, but they’re doubtful to look great in print.

When I talk to people who don’t like their prints, I ask them what tools they used to calibrate their monitors, and they look at me with either confusion or shame. Don’t make the same mistake!

2. Design your book in your chosen program

Now that you’ve chosen your book designing software and calibrated your monitor, you can have fun with the actual design!

No matter what program you use, here are a few things to keep in mind:

• Begin with your book size. The size of your book will determine so much about your book—from the number of your photos to the size of files you need to export. You’ve already thought about this in the previous lesson, so it’s time to make a final selection. Blurb has everything from tiny squares to large landscapes. Just pick one.
• Keep it simple. When it comes to book design, less is usually more. Don’t try to cram too much onto each page. Instead, leave some white space for the images to breathe.
• Think about balance. Pairing images with complementary colors, tones, or stories can create a satisfying visual balance on the page.
• Use fonts wisely. While you don’t always need to have text, if you do, choosing the right font and size is essential. The right typography choices also contribute significantly to the story you’re telling with your images.
• Don’t forget your logo. Add your graphic elements or logos to your collection or album before exporting your images.

Now let’s jump into the in-depth tutorials on Lightroom Classic and BookWright below. I’ve picked those since they are the two most straightforward programs. If you’re interested in learning InDesign, there are plenty of step-by-step tutorials to check out (including a tutorial by yours truly).

BookWright

If you are designing in BookWright (or InDesign), start by selecting your final collection or album of images and exporting them as full, high-resolution images. Most cameras today have high enough resolution for a 12×12 inch book, so just export them at their native size, and you should be fine. 

However, if you are shooting with an older camera, you might need to increase the size slightly when you are exporting them. sRGB JPGs at 100% quality at their original size are also perfectly acceptable. Finally, don’t forget to enjoy the process!

Lightroom Classic

If you are using the Book module in Lightroom Classic, just choose your second (or third or fourth) pass collection or album and then go into the Book module and start placing images. If you need to edit any of them, you can do it directly in Lightroom Classic, and they’ll update in your design. Remember to have fun!

How to order your book

You’ve selected your photos, picked out your format, and designed the layout of your book. Now, it’s time to make the actual order. What’s great is that all three of these programs allow you to submit your book directly to Blurb. It’s easy.

There are a few things to keep in mind during the ordering process.

• Carefully choose your paper. Your book’s paper, cover, and even wrapping all play a part in its purpose and meaning. It’s vital to take time to select the best options for your project. Blurb offers archival quality paper with finishes from high gloss to premium matte.
• Select the cover style. Your book’s cover is one of the first things people will see, so it’s foundational for making a good impression. Blurb offers a wide range of cover styles and materials, from softcover to hardcover with dust jacket.
• Review your project. Preview your PDFs at 200% to check for spelling and punctuation errors, bleed issues, blurry images, and pixelated text. It may be worthwhile to have a friend look things over as well!
• Just order one for now. Even if you plan on printing a bundle of books, it’s a great idea to see your finished product first. With a proof copy, you can confirm that what you are expecting to translate to the printed page is translated in the way you are expecting.

My final project

During these lessons, I made both a layflat book and a trade book as a companion to the main photo book. Ready to see the finished product? We’ll unbox together.

I hope you’ve found this tutorial helpful! If you have any questions, reach out. I’ll be answering them via my upcoming online event with Dan Milnor and Blurb!

***

Read the rest of Jared’s series with the case for printing photo books and how to pick your photos for your photo book with Blurb. Or see the whole tutorial on Jared Platt’s website!

The post How to design and print your book with Blurb appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Editor’s note: In this three-part series, pro photographer and educator Jared Platt will teach you to create high-quality photo books with Blurb. Jared will take you step-by-step through picking your photos for your photo book, using the top bookmaking tools, and printing your end product. Want to see the entire tutorial? Visit Jared Platt’s website!

Welcome to class. I’m Jared Platt, a professional photographer and educator, and I’m ready to help you in the process of making a photo book. In this set of lessons and assignments, I will walk you through the process of creating your own self-published photo book.

In this part of the series, we will focus on picking your images for your perfect photo book. This is an extremely important step, as the quality and selection of images will make or break your finished product. Let’s get started.

How to pick a theme for your photo book

It can be daunting to sit down and start a print photography project. Where do you even begin? The answer is simple: with a photo book theme.

A theme provides a roadmap for your photo book layout and helps you to determine which images will best tell your story. This will help you to narrow down your images and create a cohesive layout.

There are endless possibilities for themes, so take some time to brainstorm. Once you have a photo book theme in mind, you can start selecting images that fit your vision. Keep in mind the overall tone of the book as you make your selections. You may also want to consider the size and shape of the images in order to create a balanced design. With a little planning, you can create a beautiful photo book that tells a story and captures your unique style.

That said, life is full of surprises. Sometimes, we set out with a clear plan, but end up deviating from that plan in unexpected ways. The same is true for photography. We may set out to capture a certain scene or subject, but end up finding something even more interesting along the way. For this reason, it’s sometimes best to simply let the photos dictate the theme of your photo book. By definition, a photo book is a collection of images that tell a story. So, if you find yourself with a collection of photos that don’t seem to fit together, don’t worry! Just let the photos be your guide, and trust that they will eventually lead you to the perfect theme for your book.

How to search for and collect your images

With your theme in mind, just start looking for images that stand out to you amidst all your photos. Once you have found a few images that inspire you, start doing some research based on those images.

You can use keywords, locations, people, or dates to help you find more images. If you are using the Lightroom desktop or mobile applications, you can also use Adobe Sensei to help you find images. Once you have found some images that you like, throw them in your collection and move on. Don’t be too detailed at this point, just collect on an instinctual level.

If you’re anything like me, your photos are scattered across multiple hard drives, and you may even have them on SD cards, and cloud storage providers. Even if you’re relatively organized, it can still be a pain to track down a specific photo. That’s where Lightroom comes in. Lightroom is a powerful photo management tool that makes it easy to find, view, and organize your photos.

Collect images with Lightroom

A great way to keep your photos organized is to create a collection or album in Lightroom Classic or Lightroom Desktop and sync it with the Cloud. This will allow you to find photos more easily and keep them organized. To do this, simply find the Collection or Album panel in Lightroom Classic or Lightroom Desktop and click the plus button. Then, make a new Collection/Album and start collecting items into that collection. You will be far more efficient if you assign that collection/album to be your Target Collection and you Sync it with the Cloud (the Lightroom Ecosystem). By doing this, you will be able to find photos more easily and keep them organized in one place.

As you focus on creating your first collection, keep an eye out for quality images as well as those that help tell the story you’re trying to create. By being more selective in this first pass, you’ll be able to put together a stronger, more focused collection. And don’t forget to include your favorite shots! The most important thing is that you enjoy the process and end up with a collection that you’re proud of.

How to pare down your collection

You now probably have a ton of photos—perhaps even hundreds—it’s time to pare them down. When creating a photo book, it’s important to select images that will tell your story in the most effective way. This means that you may need to select some of your lesser-quality photos or even delete some altogether.

Before you begin paring, it’s a good idea to create a new collection or album with the same name but Second Pass at the end. Make it the Target Collection and start looking through your first collection. Look for common themes and connections between images. If you are telling a narrative story, look for images that will help push the narrative along. 

Working with Lightroom

It’s helpful to work in Lightroom once again at this stage. You can even create a virtual copy of the image you want to keep in the main collection and then start working on the new version. This way, you can keep the original safe and work on a copy. You can also use Lightroom’s flagging system to mark images you want to keep. To do this, simply click on the flag in the toolbar and select the desired option. You can use stars, flags, or even colors to organize your images, just choose the method that works best for you.

Picking photos for a photo book can be a daunting task, but it’s also a lot of fun! By focusing on your theme and collecting images that inspire you, you’ll be well on your way to using all the photos in your camera!

Pro tip: Use the Command or Control Key with the B or T key to add them to the target collection (B in Lightroom Classic and T in Lightroom Desktop). Or just drag the images into the new, smaller collection.

You’ll want to be far more selective on this pass. Keep only the strongest photos that best represent your theme and story. Delete any images that are poor in quality, don’t fit with the rest of the collection, or are simply unnecessary. This process can be tough, but it’s necessary to create a high-quality photo book.

How many photos to select

How many photos should you select for your print photography book? This is a question that often plagues photographers, especially those who are just starting out. The answer, of course, depends on a number of factors, including the size of the book and the purpose of the book. For example, if you are creating a large coffee table book, you will likely want to include more photos than if you are making a smaller album for personal use. The same is true if you are hoping to sell your book or use it as a portfolio; in these cases, you’ll want to be selective in order to present your best work.

Ultimately, there is no hard and fast rule for how many photos to include in a print photography book. My general rule of thumb is to start with a selection of around 25 images for an 8×8 book, or 50 for an 11×14 layout.  This is a good starting point, but you may want to include more or fewer photos depending on your individual project.

It’s important to remember that the goal is to tell a story with your photos, not just fill up a book with as many images as possible. By being selective and choosing the strongest images, you can create a photo book that is both beautiful and meaningful.

In the end, the best approach is to select the strongest photos that best represent your theme and story. This may mean including fewer photos than you initially thought, but it will result in a more cohesive, high-quality book.

Guiding questions

Paring down your first selection is easy with a few simple questions:

• Does this image fit with my theme?
• Is this image high quality?
• Do I really need this image?

If the answer to any of these questions is no, then you probably don’t need the photo.

When you’re finished, take a look at your new second pass collection. Is it still telling the story you want to tell? If not, continue looking through your first collection and make more selections. Once you’re happy with the images in your second pass collection, it’s time to start creating your photo book.

Work with an editor

But wait! A second set of eyes can be extremely helpful when it comes to editing your work. Friends and family can be a great resource for this, as they can offer quality feedback and help you to catch any duplicates or holes that you may have missed. However, it is also important to choose someone who you trust to give you honest feedback, as well as someone who is familiar with the genre of the project you’re working on.

In addition, a mentor or other experienced professional photographer can be a great asset when it comes to polishing your work and ensuring that it is of the best possible quality. By taking advantage of these resources, you can ensure that you have chosen your strongest images—well before you start your layout.

Decide on your final presentation

With your pared-down collection in hand, it’s time to start imagining the end product. You’ve probably already started this process during the selection step. In fact, as concrete ideas come to mind of how to present your images, you write them down and entertain them as you go about your day.

Ask yourself questions

But the moment has come to make some choices about the final look and feel of your book. Again, it’s worthwhile to use some guiding questions to help.

• What is the purpose of this book? Are you looking to entertain travelers in a bookstore or impress guests with a beautiful coffee table book?
• What mood would you like to evoke? Is it a serious meditation on the trauma of war or a humorous look at gas station signs?
• What kind of price point do you want to hit for this book? Are luxurious materials worth the extra cost or should you stick to more affordable options?

Once you have some answers to these questions, it’s time to start sketching out some ideas and making final decisions. This can be a fun process, but it’s important to remember that the goal is to create a beautiful and cohesive book, not just a bunch of pretty pictures.

Look for inspiring photo books

When it comes to creating a photography book, inspiration can be found in many places. You can browse photo book templates for inspiration. You can find ready-made templates at most online photo book companies, like Blurb’s BookWright, or you can create your own using design software like InDesign, Photoshop, or Illustrator.

Other photographers’ work is another great source of inspiration, as photo books can offer ideas for sequencing, layout, and design. Be sure to check out photo book galleries, both online and in-person, to get a sense of what’s possible and find ideas that you may not have considered.

By the way, you can also find books and magazines in the Blurb Bookstore. There, you’ll find a wide variety of photography books, ranging from traditional portfolios to more experimental works. By browsing the titles in the store, you can get a feel for the many different ways that photographers are telling stories with their images. You’ll also be supporting other artists like yourself.

Once you have a solid idea of the look and feel of your book, it’s time to start laying out your images. This is where the real magic happens, as you get to see your photos come to life in a finished product. Head to the next part of my series to see it all come together.

***

Continue Jared’s ongoing series with the case for printing photo books and how to design and print your book with Blurb. Or see the whole tutorial on Jared Platt’s website!

The post How to pick photos for your photo book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Editor’s note: In this three-part series, pro photographer and educator Jared Platt will teach you to create high-quality photo books with Blurb. Jared will take you step-by-step through picking your photos, using the top bookmaking tools, and printing your end product. Want to see the entire tutorial? Visit Jared Platt’s website!

Printing a photo book is a fantastic way to cut through the online noise, present your work to customers or clients, and even sharpen your skills as a photographer. Photo books are physical objects that demand to be handled and looked through—rather than posted and scrolled past. By taking the time to curate and sequence your images, you can create a narrative that wouldn’t be possible in a digital format, and that will last for years, not seconds.

With almost two decades in the field as a published photographer and educator, Jared Platt knows more than a thing or two about the art and business of photography and publishing. Whether you’re a professional photographer, semi-pro, or ambitious amateur, he’ll walk you through the reasons why and the how of printing your own. He’ll take it from here:

Why print professional photo books?

Get past the gatekeepers

When I was in college in the 1990s, the internet was still in its infancy, and book and magazine publishers were the gatekeepers to a mass market of viewers for photographers. During my undergraduate studies, I took a course from Mary V. Swanson that was based on the business of photography and getting published. We would take field trips to the bookstore and browse through all genres of magazines and books, researching which publishing companies were using photos so we could submit our work to them.

Photographers at the time either maintained their expensive hobby for themselves alone or continued to submit work to publishers in the hopes of reaching a wider audience. On the off chance that a photographer had plenty of cash upfront, they could also try to self-publish.

But early in my career, the only way to publish your own book project was to print hundreds of them. I knew photographers who sold their extra car to pay to print their book and then spent the next ten years trying to sell that book and recoup the cost. They did it because they understood the value of the book experience. 

I don’t think there is a better way to enjoy photographs than in a well-printed book or magazine. It is the perfect viewing distance to really feel the image and the ideal opportunity to add contextual information, with text accompanying the photographs.

In the past, the only way to create that joy of photography in print was to hope that the gatekeeping publishing industry would accept your photographs or sell that second car to try to print and market your book yourself.

Now, platforms like Blurb have leveled the playing field so that photographers can print their books and market them to a global audience. The best part is that these tools are democratizing the process of publishing by making it more affordable for people to print high-quality books (or magazines) at high volumes or even just one at a time. 

This is as big as the online photo revolution that we’ll discuss next but with a better outcome for the photos!

Cut through the online noise

The gatekeepers of the publishing industry have not only fallen to self-publishers. They’ve fallen to the open free-for-all arena of social media, blogs, and turnkey websites. But while the world gained access to many amazing photographers with the rise of the internet, many of their amazing images instantly get lost in the noise. It’s never been easier to post your photos, but it’s also never been harder to get noticed.

Everywhere I go, I see people buried in their phones, scrolling through Facebook or Instagram. I was recently in line at the grocery store, and five of the six people in line were scrolling but not reading. Instead, they constantly slid their finger up or down the screen—rapidly consuming images and videos. It made me think twice about the impact my photos have on Instagram.

Today, any photographer can reach the masses with a free social media account and a smartphone. But whether those masses will see their images depends now on searches, algorithms, and trends. Over 500 million people are sifting through 95 million photos and videos posted to Instagram every single day! No wonder the people in the grocery store line never stopped swiping through pictures on their phones. Who has the time?

The truth is, if you’re a photographer, your images are competing with billions of images online. Rather than go up against huge companies and influencers who spend their time and money learning how to beat those algorithms, you can skip the crowds with a printed photo book. While anyone can post online, a book is a physical object that can’t be scrolled past or ignored. This is another great reason why to print a photo book. It’s a tangible way to break through the digital clutter and present your work in a way that demands attention.

Present your work to clients

I am a professional photographer, paid to take portraits of people and document weddings, among other events. This new access to one-of-a-kind book printing changed how I provide physical images to my clients. 

Before affordable books were available, I had two options to share shoots with my clients. One, print an unmanageable stack of loose proofs that could get lost in the mail. Or two, post them online where the images would be viewed on the client’s uncalibrated monitor with scary saturation in the magentas and the sharpness turned up to 1,000%. 

By affordably printing a single book or a magazine for clients, I can control the print quality and the experience they have when looking through their images. I can curate which images are shown next to which and decide the size of each image. I’ve found there is no better way to offer clients the results of their wedding or photoshoot than in a well-styled and exquisitely printed book.  This is another obvious reason to print a photo book.

Although I use quite a few different programs to design different books, Blurb has always printed them, and my clients love the experience of sitting down and looking through their images from a wedding or a portrait session with a beautifully printed and designed book.

Maintain creative control of your art

Even though I make my income in portraits, weddings, and lifestyle photography, I am like all photographers on the planet. I love making landscapes, still lifes, travel photography, and documentary photography work. And most of the time, that kind of work is entirely personal. 

But at times, I still want people to enjoy the images in a way that I control. I can’t do that on Instagram or Facebook, so I don’t often publish my photographic work online. Instead, I use self-published books and magazines that allow me total say over the final experience.

Creating a photo book is much more deliberate than simply uploading photos to a website or sharing them on social media. You get to curate your images and decide what size the book will be, how many pages, and what kind of paper. You pick the style of the cover, customize the layout, and choose where to sell or gift the product.

And in the end, you have a beautifully printed artifact that you made entirely yourself. There is something magical about holding a printed photo book in your hands. It’s a physical embodiment of your creative vision that you can share with others (or keep entirely to yourself). When you make a photo book, you create a timeless object that will be around long after you’re gone—something that the internet can’t provide.

Hone your photography skills

Finally, self-publishing a book also provides an incredible learning experience for you as a photographer. For the majority, there is very little thought that goes into posting an image to social media. 

But reviewing and selecting images and designing a book around those images is an entirely different experience. It inspires deeper thinking, more planning, and most importantly, it slows the process down a little. When you decide you are going to make a book, the exercise of selecting your images becomes a much more serious endeavor. You ask yourself more questions about the photos and how they fit together. Just the need to come up with a title for the book forces you to think about the theme of your selects.  

As you design your book, you place each image on the page with a great deal of thought. Will it be on its own? Will there be an image on the facing page, or with there be any text to help explain the pictures? Should the photo fill the entire page? If not, how big should it be? Should it be cropped to fit the page design a little better? And if so, how does that change the image’s meaning? 

Putting photos on a series of pages also means you must think of the sequence and the cadence of the story you’re telling. This self-publishing process is one of the most productive things a photographer can do to improve their photography.

Making a photo book is an enriching experience, both creatively and personally. It allows you to take complete control of your work from start to finish, and the process of creating one will make you a better photographer. If you’ve never made a photo book before, I urge you to try it. 

Start your journey with me

The internet and social media opened up the floodgates and connected photographers with the world. But the availability and affordability of self-publishing finally made it possible for photographers to bypass the gatekeepers and present their art in a truly meaningful way to connoisseurs of photography. Not only are my Blurb books a considerable part of my professional photography business, but they are also an integral part of my improvement as an artist. 

If you have not created a self-published book, now is a great time to start. It doesn’t have to be a big, expensive book. It could be a simple magazine. But take this as a challenge. 

As for me, I always have a few personal bookmaking projects happening at any one time. I am now creating a book I call Notes, a small book with a mixture of photographs spanning my entire career and my thoughts about the photographs. Often those thoughts are stories about the photos, and sometimes they are metaphoric musings inspired by the photos. I have been working on that project for a little over a year now. 

I also recently completed my 0º project, a large book of landscape images with a small behind-the-scenes companion book. I documented the process unfolding in the videos and text of the following two blogs in this series.

I discuss the entire activity of reviewing and selecting images, honing in on a subject for the book, choosing the right kind of book for the project, and even designing the book. I also show the step-by-step process of using two different book designing tools: Adobe Lightroom Classic’s Book Module and Blurb’s BookWright software. I hope you will join me and engage in your own self-publishing project at the same time.

Check out the following two blogs in my guide on how to start a photo book. You will walk away with far more than a book in hand.

***

Continue Jared’s series on how to pick photos for a photo book and how to design and print your book with Blurb. Or see the whole tutorial on Jared Platt’s website! And if you’re a visual learner, dive right into Jared’s video on starting a book project with Blurb.

The post The case for printing photo books appeared first on Blurb Blog.

How do book pre-order campaigns work?

A pre-sale period is the time between when your completed book is ready for distribution and when it’s actually available for sale. Don’t think of a pre-sale period as days or weeks. Think months. In fact, I often suggest authors begin telling the story of their book long before it has actually been completed. Offering small glimpses into your creative process, or ideas that didn’t quite make the final cut are great ways of building a buzz before your final draft is even complete. The longer the pre-sale period, the more time you have to promote your book .

How to boost your pre-order book sales

A successful pre-order book strategy will make use of all of the marketing channels you have available. There are the obvious ones like posting on social media , an email newsletter, your author website . But think outside the box, too. Could you partner with a local bookstore to hold a pre-order event where you read a snippet of the book? If you’re being interviewed on the radio or for a podcast, ask for a shout-out.

It’s not just a case of letting people know your book is on the way, although awareness is obviously important. To encourage people to place a pre-sale order, you’ll need to offer incentives. Bonuses for these early bird fans could include:

• Pre-order swag: a guaranteed signed copy of your book, an exclusive excerpt, a sneak peek of a deleted scene, etc.
• Discounted book price
• A charitable donation of their choice
• A shoutout on social media

Use the time to get your book reviewed

Before your book officially launches, send exclusive early proof copies to trusted readers, fellow authors, or known experts in a relevant field. Positive reviews from the right people lend credibility to your project and help to build anticipation amongst your ideal target audiences.

There are practical benefits too …

Some retailers place great emphasis on authors having pre-order promotions. Amazon , for example, tracks things like pre-sale page views, pre-orders, and adds to wish-lists to help determine the number of books they will order.

In essence, a pre-order book strategy is about building excitement around your book before it launches. The earlier you can start this process the better. Use all your available marketing channels to ensure that when your book is officially available for sale, there is already a long list of readers who have made their purchase. This is no guarantee your book will become a bestseller, but at the very least you are laying the foundation for a successful publishing experience.

The post Why You Need a Pre-Order Book Strategy appeared first on Blurb Blog.

There are a few different ways to digitize your old photos. You could download an app to your mobile phone or send your archive to a photo scanning service. But for the best results, it’s worth investing a little time in using a flatbed scanner at home. 

Here’s what you’ll need to get started:

• A flatbed scanner. Most home office printers have a built-in scanner and provide the relevant software to install on your computer. 
• A clean microfiber cloth.
• Compressed air. (Optional)
• Photo editing software. Either the software that comes with your scanner or a tool like Adobe Photoshop.(Optional) 

Step 1: Get organized

Start by taking stock of the number of photos you want to digitize and make a plan. Depending on how much time you have available, breaking your entire archive into smaller piles makes scanning your old photos a more manageable task. Around 15-20 photos in one sitting is probably about right.

You could also scan pieces of memorabilia to use as part of your photo book project. Maps, newspaper clippings, charts, event programs, tickets, certificates, announcements, official documents (deeds, wills), recipes, letters, poems, stories, songs, art, drawings, and diary or journal pages can all be scanned along with your images.

Step 2: Prepare your scanner and photos

To get the best results, both your scanner and the photos themselves should be free of smudges, smears, and dust as even the smallest specks will show up.

Start by wiping down your scanner bed with a clean, dry microfiber cloth. Avoid using paper towels or tissues for this job as they leave behind tiny specks of debris and may even scratch the surface.

To get rid of smudges, you can dampen a small part of your microfiber cloth and gently clean the glass. Let it dry completely before scanning your photos.

Top tip: Wipe the scanner bed with your cloth after every few scans to keep it free of dust.

If you have it, compressed air is the best way to remove dust particles from your photos. But gently dusting them with your dry microfiber cloth will work too.

You might be tempted to try and smooth out the creases and curled edges of old photos. But this can cause more damage. Instead, gently lay the photo down as flat as possible and scan as it is. Most crease lines can be edited out later with photo-editing software. (Plus, these markings are part of the charm of your old photos.)

Step 3: Scan in color

Even your oldest sepia photos should be scanned in full-color. Black and white images can be scanned in full color too, unless they have been damaged by ink or tape residue. In this case, scanning in grayscale will make it easier to touch up those photos later.

Step 4: Choose your resolution

Best practice is to scan your photos at the highest resolution available, as you can always reduce the resolution later, if needed. But scanning at 600 dpi will be sufficient for most images. If you have limited digital storage space, you can scan at 300 dpi. At this resolution your images will be sharp, but they will lose integrity when enlarged. 

To share photos online, scan them as you would any other image with a high resolution to create an archive copy, and then export them to 200dpi JPGs. This smaller image is better for posting online or emailing to friends.

Top tip: BookWright will flag any images with a resolution lower than 250 dpi. You will need to shrink the image until this warning disappears to ensure the best results in print.

Step 5: Scan and save

You might want to start by scanning just one image at a time. But as you feel more confident, you can save time by scanning a few at once. The average home scanner should be able to scan four 4×6 in. photos at a time. You’ll want to leave about a quarter inch of space around each image. This will make it easier to crop them into individual files later.

As you scan each item, label the digital file clearly. Try to include meaningful details and use the same structure for each image. E.g. May 1954_New York_MumAndDad. You may end up with enough photos to create a second or third volume of your photo book, so organization counts!

Step 6: Touch up

When it comes to editing, you may not want to do much more than crop or straighten your images. Most free photo-editing software should be able to take care of this and other minor touch ups such as removing red-eye or applying basic color corrections. To make more extensive changes, such as removing crease lines, you’ll need a more sophisticated tool like Adobe Photoshop.

Once all your photos are scanned and saved as digital files, you’re ready to start making your book.

The post How to Scan Your Old Photos appeared first on Blurb Blog.

We admire your talent and creativity, and we can’t wait to see what you create next. Check out these professional tips, ideas, and inspiration to fuel your future projects. 

INTERVIEWS WITH BLURB CREATORS

You belong to a powerful, inspiring, adventurous creative community of Blurb bookmakers. Find out how fellow artists, photographers, and designers brought their unique visions to life. 

J LeShaé – Zine Artist & Activist 

Chloe Ferres – Book Designer & Photographer 

Elliot Ross – Documentary Photographer 

Kristal Bean – Portrait Photographer 

Allyn Howard – Artist, Illustrator, Designer

BOOKMAKING, DESIGN & PHOTOGRAPHY TIPS 

In the world of book design, you prefer seamless integration with pro tools. The more creative control, the better. A professional showcase calls for high quality materials and technical production. Hi-res photos or bust. We totally get it.  

How to Make a Great Page Layout 

12 Landscape Photography Tips 

How to Photograph Fog, Food, the Moon, Artwork & More

PROJECT IDEAS & CHALLENGES 

Some days bookmaking is all about having a creative outlet to explore new ideas and try different techniques. Give yourself time to wander, experiment, doodle, tinker, and enjoy the process–wherever it may lead. 

50 Ideas for Writing a Book

How to Make a Test Book (and Why You Should)

Setting Creative Limits: Make an 8×10 Trade Book

SELF-PROMOTION AND SELLING 

Some days the goal is sharing your work as a creative professional and selling books. Chances are, you rarely leave home without a copy of your latest creation. Look book or leave-behind, anyone? #SideHustle #FreelanceLife #DreamGig 

10 Tips for Creating a Successful Author Website 

How to Sell Your Book on Ingram (and Why You Should) 

How Do I Get Recognized? 

Have plan for your next book? Choose a format and get started today. 

The post Bookmaking Tips & Ideas for Professional Projects appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Every book project looks a little different. So we put together design tips, ideas, and inspiration you can use today. From story to design to printed page, Blurb can help you get there. 

INTERVIEWS WITH BLURB CREATORS

You belong to a creative, generous, and inspiring community of Blurb bookmakers. Find out how your fellow authors put their ideas in print. 

Bryan Kitch, A Is for Anteater
Illustrated children’s book

Bridget Callahan, The Not-So-Italian Italian Cookbook 
Cookbook

Dan Rubin, Sri Lanka
Travel photography

Hannah and Josh Eloge
Adoption profile book

Debra Pexa, Around the Table: A Family Love Story
Cookbook

BOOKMAKING & DESIGN TIPS 

Your ideal book project is easy, personalized, and polished. Naturally, you love a good step-by-step tutorial. Quick BookWright templates? Absolutely. Using auto flow to fill your photo layouts? Bring it on. Keep up the great bookmaking with a few extra pointers. 

Which Design Tool Is Right for You?

BookWright: Quick Design Feature + 10 Photo Book Templates 

5 Tips for a Standout Book Cover 

10 Tips for Making a Custom Cookbook

PHOTOGRAPHY TIPS 

A sneak peek at your camera roll most likely reveals your family, friends, pets, travel pics, and favorite recipes. Learn how to make the most out of the photos you love. 

10 Tips for Taking Better Photos 

How to Organize Your Photos

How to Curate Your Family Holiday Photos 

PROJECT IDEAS & INSPIRATION 

Everybody needs a little creative pick-me-up now and then. Check out these great book ideas to help spark your next personal project. 

19 Photo Book Gift Ideas 

How to Make a Family Tree Book

How to Make a Grandparent Memory Book

Have an idea for your next book? Choose a format and get started today. 

The post Bookmaking Tips & Ideas for Personal Projects appeared first on Blurb Blog.

So, what’s the best way to create a portfolio? Let’s have a look at some key guidelines and design tips to help you make a portfolio that stands out.

What is a portfolio?

In simple terms, a portfolio is a collection of your best work. Think of it as a showcase or display of your writing skills. It’s basically like an online resume for creators where you can show off your artistic chops to potential clients or employers.

A portfolio typically includes a variety of samples to show your expertise and your range. The key is to choose your strongest pieces that highlight your unique style and abilities. So if you’re serious about pursuing a career in a creative field, building a killer portfolio should be at the top of your to-do list!

Professional tips for creating a portfolio

Remember, a portfolio isn’t a book. A book has a narrative and tells a story, while a portfolio is a sample of your absolute best work. And that brings us to our first rule of making a portfolio.

Less is more

A portfolio is lean, thoughtful, and built on quality, not quantity. When it comes to the correct number of images always stock with a “less is more” mentality. When an agent, art buyer, editor, or curator looks at your portfolio they should be able to make their decision about your work in a matter of minutes. Think 20-25 images, keeping a second batch in reserve in case the reviewer asked to see more. Repeats, redundant images, or work that you’re not proud of should be left out. 

Top tip: If you are just starting out, aim for a small, layflat book with ten to twenty samples of your best work. Simple, clean, and personal. 

Plan for the job you want

Your portfolio should primarily contain the kind of work you actually want to do. If you are looking for travel, sport, architecture, or editorial assignments then that is the kind of imagery you should show. However, you are not limited to having only one portfolio. You can create multiple portfolios to showcase various types of work, including one focused on your personal or pro-bono projects. 

Keep it up-to-date

Your portfolio should always remain current, ideally showing your most recent, relevant work. I would consider reviewing your portfolio at the end of each job, project, or assignment. Is there a place for your latest creation there? 

Get specific

Print on demand technology allows you to get hyper-specific with your portfolio. Think about fine-tuning it for a specific editor, collector, or client. For example, you could change the cover image to reflect their specialty. 

Introduce yourself

Your portfolio should include a small section about yourself and the way you work—your creative process. Clients are not only interested in your work, they are also interested in you as a human being. Honesty and humor are great, ego not so much. 

Think digital 

While a printed portfolio makes a powerful impression, we live in a Digital Age. So it’s a good idea to create a portfolio in a digital format too. A website is a great place to start, especially a website that allows for big, bold image placement. Remember to make sure your site is accessible on all devices.

A lot of the points outlined above apply to your digital portfolio, too. It should be kept up to date with your latest and greatest pieces. It’s tempting to include more examples on a digital platform but remember, less is more. Keep your examples organized and structured so that it’s easy to navigate. Don’t forget your “about” page as well. Again, clients like to know who they are dealing with and not just that you can make a solid picture or piece of art. 

The perfect portfolio is a blend of physical and digital work that highlights your skills and potential. Learn how to sell yourself and your work today with plenty of creative portfolio resources from your cheerleaders at Blurb. 

Ready to get started on your portfolio? Pick a tool that suits your workflow.

The post How to make a portfolio appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Whether your goal is to relieve stress, inspire creativity, or showcase your drawing skills, there are plenty of great reasons to make your own coloring book—and it’s easier than you think. With Blurb’s free book-making tools, you can design and print a DIY coloring book to keep, gift, or sell.

Planning and drawing your DIY coloring book

1. Select a theme 

Your DIY coloring book can be simple and straightforward, or wild and whimsical. Focus on imagery that inspires you—animals, flowers, landscapes, food, people, objects, or abstract designs. Choosing a single theme isn’t absolutely necessary, but it will give your coloring book a cohesive feel. For example, illustrator Sylvie Lee, chose to combine botanical illustrations and fun facts in her unique coloring book, State Flowers of America. Not sure what to draw? Start by tracing a photograph or looking at fabric patterns for inspiration.

2. Consider your audience 

Who is this coloring book for? The age and dexterity level of your audience will affect how you draw your images. If your book is intended for children using crayons, you’ll want designs with thicker outlines and larger blank spaces to fill in. Whereas a coloring book for adults may have drawings that are more complex with thinner lines and smaller, intricate details. We love the way Jessie Oleson Moore found a way to captivate people of all ages with her magical illustrations in The Unicorn Coloring Book.

3. Decide on a trim size and page orientation 

Before you start designing, visualize the look and feel of your coloring book. You want pages that are large enough to show the details of each drawing and be easily colored in with different media (pencils, ink, or markers). If you’re going to scan your illustrations, consider the size and orientation of the original images when selecting a trim size. Are your drawings already on 8½ x 11-inch pages? Do want your coloring book to have portrait or landscape-style pages?

4. Choose a medium and start drawing

Most coloring books feature black-and-white illustrations. If you’re drawing by hand, you may want to sketch in pencil first. That way you can adjust your compositions before using a felt tip pen or marker to ink the final outlines. Medium or thick black lines will also scan and print well if you’re converting hand-drawn illustrations to digital images.

Creating your coloring book layout

1. Organize your pages

Decide on a sequence for your coloring book pages and organize your illustrations. That could involve laying out your drawings on a table or sorting your digital image files until you’re happy with the order. You can always swap out pages later, but creating your book layout will be easier if you plan ahead. Check out the strategy that designer and illustrator Sylvie Lee used to create her lovely coloring book, State Flowers of America:

I have always felt it was easier and more enjoyable to write or draw on the right-hand page of a double-page spread, so I kept all the coloring areas on this side. Another benefit of this layout is that it leaves room for fun facts on the left-hand page and you won’t bleed onto another coloring page if you happen to be using a heavy marker or another wet medium.

Sylvie Lee, author of State Flowers of America

2. Scan your artwork

When you’ve finished illustrating and organizing the pages of your coloring book, the next step is to scan them. Make sure to scan all your image files at a high enough resolution so the lines appear crisp and the image quality is consistent on every page. If you scan a detailed drawing at a low resolution (or try to enlarge a small, low-resolution image to fit a large page), you may end up with jagged outlines and blurry images. Do a few test scans to make sure the digital images look good when enlarged to the actual size of your coloring book pages.

3. Pick a format

One of the most practical and affordable ways to make a coloring book is as a trade book with Standard Black & White paper. The texture makes black outlines stand out and rich colors stick. The 8 by 10 inch trade book is a perfect size for coloring books.

4. Select a bookmaking tool

Blurb has a range of design and publishing tools to fit your project and skill level. One of the fastest and simplest ways to print a coloring book is with Blurb’s PDF uploader. You can draw your pages by hand or digitally, then upload your PDF to create a print-ready coloring book!

For more creative control, download our desktop software BookWright, then drag and drop your images into place on each page. This tool makes it easy to add captions or text boxes too.

If you already created your layout with Adobe InDesign, use our free plugin to publish your Blurb coloring book.

5. Choose a cover and print your book

Most coloring books feature a colorful image on the front and back cover to give people a sneak preview and spark their imagination. Do you have a favorite illustration in the collection? Choose a cover drawing that captures the style and content of your book. You might show it in full color or as a coloring page in progress.

6. Share your coloring book

Everybody can use a little creative pick-me-up, so surprise your friends and family (of all ages) with a one-of-a-kind gift. If you want to promote your artwork to fans and followers, set your coloring book up for sale in the Blurb Bookstore or via Amazon. For more inspiration and advice, read Jessie Oleson Moore’s story of making and self-publishing The Unicorn Coloring Book.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing company that helps you make and print books on demand. Ready to make your own coloring book? Get started today with our free bookmaking tools! 

The post How to make a coloring book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

In short, typography is a language all of its own, and if you are creating a book, magazine, or even a piece of wall art, knowing the basics of typography will ensure you are making the best decisions when it comes to type. Not to mention, learning typography is fun.

Now that we have a basic typography definition, why don’t we explore elements of typography design a little more closely:

Elements of typography

Two terms you will often hear in regard to typography are typeface and font. These two elements are related and play well together. Think of it like this:

A typeface is the design of lettering that can include variations such as bold, regular, light, italic, condensed, and more. Each one of these variations is a font. Someone who designs typefaces is called a type designer.

Another typography term is contrast, which refers to the grouping of two different typographical elements and using different traditional design methods to create a contrast. One element takes center stage while the second element takes less attention, but still adds to the overall design.

Typography design: contrast

There are four main techniques for creating contrast with typography; size, color, spacing, and shape.

Contrast by size

Size is relatively self-explanatory. Say for example you use a large typeface for the title of your book, and a much smaller, less dominant typeface for your subtitle. They are both important, but the second element does not distract from the first.

Contrast by color

Using color to achieve contrast means taking advantage of things like type density, using the full range of the grayscale, or using vibrant colors to offset different typefaces.

Contrast by spacing

Contrast through spacing can be as easy as justifying your type to the left, right, or center. But it can also be achieved through letter spacing, word spacing, or line spacing. Letter spacing refers to the measurement or space between letters. This same idea applies to word spacing and line spacing. Here is a little hint. Spacing takes practice, and there is a fine line between good spacing and going too far which could weaken the overall power of your design.

Contrast by shape

Finally, contrast by shape could mean using both italic and bold fonts together, or perhaps an artistic font paired with a simple or basic font.

Typography design: hierarchy

Typographic hierarchy refers to organizing type in a way that allows the reader to quickly find the information they are after.

Let’s say you are creating a book about poetry readings and you are listing the locations, the dates, and the titles of each event. Using a good typographical hierarchy means you are styling each of these data points in a unique way so that the reader can quickly identify a date, a location, or a title. The hierarchy should also take alignment into account. Type alignment refers to the placement of type in relation to other elements on the page, such as photographs, columns, tabs, etc.

Typography helps to create a sense of style and making small changes to your typography choices can be both liberating and strategic. My last piece of advice is this. Think about your typography as equal to all other aspects of your publication. Things like trim size, paper type, borders, and the size of the photographs are all important. Type is a peer to these other elements and requires the same amount of thought and dedication. Take your time and explore the options.

***

Blurb is a print-on-demand book publishing company. Design your book with our free bookmaking software, BookWright, and then learn about distribution options to sell it!

The post What is typography and why is it important? appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Let’s take a look at some of the key features and benefits of metal wall décor.

How are images or photographs printed on metal?

We use a combination of heat and pressure to infuse your image into a radiant, ultra-thin aluminum panel with smooth, rounded edges. This thermal transfer process creates a vivid, crisp image with superior clarity. Using a wide print gamut and high-gloss coating also ensures vibrant color and authentic reproduction.

What are the benefits of printing on metal?

Metal Wall Art has a lustrous finish to bring out radiant colors and precise details in your photos and images. If you like contemporary décor, metallic prints are a great choice. These stunning, gallery-quality photo prints add brilliant color and flair to the spaces you love—from bedrooms, kitchens, and offices to art and design studios. At Blurb, metal prints are also a beautiful option in the low to moderate price range for our wall décor products.

What are the benefits of printing on metal?

Metal Wall Art has a lustrous finish to bring out radiant colors and precise details in your photos and images. If you like contemporary décor, metallic prints are a great choice. These stunning, gallery-quality photo prints add brilliant color and flair to the spaces you love—from bedrooms, kitchens, and offices to art and design studios. At Blurb, metal prints are also a beautiful option in the low to moderate price range for our wall décor products.

Are metal prints better than canvas prints?

Each finish has its own style and unique qualities. Metal wall décor is perfect for high-color photographs and designs. Vibrant hues and crisp details stand out on smooth, luminous metal prints, whether your photo has a deep depth of field (large area in focus) or a shallow depth of field (small area in focus, foreground or background blurred). On canvas prints, the woven texture and semi-gloss finish can lend a painterly feel to photos with a shallow depth of field.  

Printing photos on metal creates a dramatic, modern look, while archival-quality canvas prints have a softness and warmth that is perfect for keepsake photography and artistic portraits. Geometric designs and abstract art look beautiful with a canvas or metal finish. If you’re seeking a budget-friendly option, Blurb’s metal and canvas prints cost less than acrylic prints.

How do you hang a metal print?

Blurb’s 8×10-inch metal prints feature a wood block with omni-directional key holes for easy hanging with a nail or screw. Larger prints feature a wall mount cleat with screws, and drywall anchors. All hanging hardware sits ½ inch off the wall to give you versatile hanging options and create a uniform look if you want to make a gallery wall with different sized art prints. If you prefer not to mount your art on the wall, you can also lean it on a mantle or bookshelf, making it super easy to rotate new pieces into your display.

Can you frame a metal print?

There’s no need to worry about choosing a frame or matte for metal wall décor because each piece is designed to stand out on its own and arrives ready to hang. The frameless display offers a simple, clean, contemporary look.

Want to learn more about Acrylic or Canvas Wall Art?  Find the finish that fits your project and start creating.

The post What Is a Metal Print? appeared first on Blurb Blog.

GETTING STARTED & CHOOSING MATERIALS 

Let’s Talk Trade Books: Q&A with Dan Milnor 
A guide to Blurb’s trade book format with tips on paper choices, cover types, selling options, and potential projects. 

3 Reasons You Need to Make a Trade Book 
Discover the best perks of publishing trade books, from print quality to pricing. 

Find Your Book Format 
A handy flowchart with key questions to consider before starting your book project. 

PROJECT IDEAS & INSPIRATION 

Inside Trade Books 
All kinds of projects can be published in trade book format–a budget photo book, a notebook or journal, a literary magazine. 

50 Book Ideas for Writing a Book You Can Start Today 
From biography to business, cooking to crafts, diet to design tips, find a great topic for your next trade book project. 

9 Steps to Create a Comic Book 
Kickstart your story, characters, and illustrations with our step-by-step guide. 

4 Creative Custom Journal & Notebook Ideas
Personalize your book pages with room for lists, goals, ideas, doodles, designs, travel stories, and more. 

10 Tips for Creating a Custom Cookbook 
Bring your favorite recipes to life using these tips on food photography, writing, and design. 

Hit the Books with Dan Milnor: Your Portfolio Book
The photographer and creative pro in the know shares his expert advice on print portfolios. 

How to Write a Poetry Book 
A guide for poets who are passionate about writing, reading, and publishing their best work. 

How to Write a Non-Fiction Book 
Use these 25 tips to write, publish, and market your trade book (essays, interviews, family history, you name it). 

How to Become a Children’s Book Author 
Eleven practical steps to help you develop a great children’s book and put it in print. 

How to Write a Novella in 9 Steps 
Get the keys to this compact story form, like pacing, character, story arc, and figurative language. 

LAYOUT & DESIGN 

10 Tips to Make a Gorgeous Trade Book 
Learn how to choose your trade book materials, balance text and typography, and select a print quality. 

How to Make a Test Book (and Why You Should) 
No matter what kind of book you are making, printing a test book in trade book format will help you find the perfect look and feel. 

Tips and Templates for Creating a Killer Product Catalog 
Get all the details right when it comes to content, photography, layout, and printing. 

7 Tips & Ideas for Building a Standout Graphic Design Portfolio 
Use this checklist to keep your portfolio content, curation, and book design on track. 

How to Make Your Own DIY Personal Planner 
Creating a planner is easy with these step-by-step design tips + content ideas. 

SELLING & DISTRIBUTION 

How to Sell Your Book on Ingram (and Why You Should) 
Harness the selling power of trade books, expand your audience, optimize your metadata, and distribute like a pro. 

How to Price a Sellable Book 
Find out how to balance your printing cost with your selling price. 

12 Ways a Book Can Help Your Business 
A portfolio. A leave behind. An archive. An anthology. A catalog. Self-publishing books of all kinds can provide the financial or creative boost you need. 

BEHIND THE BOOK INTERVIEWS  

The Modern Alphabet by Megan Roy 
Illustrated children’s book 

Letter Shoppe by Dina Marie Rodriguez 
Artistic guide to hand lettering 

State Flowers of America by Sylvie Lee 
Illustrated coloring book with fun facts 

The Accidental Airbnb Host by Veronica Tercan 
Hospitality guide book 

The post Tips & Tools of the Trade Book: A Resource Guide appeared first on Blurb Blog.

My prior work life was all about routine, but now I’m just at home all the time. How do I find structure?

You can absolutely find a new routine for working at home. This could and should include the things you do outside of your working hours; working out, reading, writing, going for walks, reflecting on the day. That’s when you should be turning your devices off. You can also create a time schedule for start and stop time as well as what duties you tackle depending on the day of the week. I think you can create a truly finite routine if that is helpful and allows you to stay creative.

When I left work I felt like I could leave my job behind, so how do I set boundaries?

I have several suggestions. Doors are your best friend. A home office with a door is a natural, physical boundary that allows you to literally seal off your work environment. One of the biggest misconceptions about remote working is that it is much easier and you have more free time. I have found, without taking precautions, working from home can easily take over your life. So, set alarms for when you start and stop. If possible, create a separate workspace you can walk away from.

Are there any other techniques that might help?

It’s really about finding a natural balance that works for you. My schedule starts at 5 AM. I know that might sound early, but it’s a beautiful time of day. And getting up early allows for incredible early productivity. I’m up at 5 AM but only to make coffee and read. I find that reading book-length material helps set my mind in the right mode for focus and long-form thinking. I read until my coffee is gone then I ride between 20-30 miles on my bike. I’m often home by 7:30 or 8 AM which still leaves me ample time before I have to start my workday. By 10 AM I have done my first round of calls, emails, and social media needs which often leaves me a good part of the day for focusing on the creative side of my work.

With everything on lockdown, I feel like I’m losing my motivation, any tips?

This I totally understand. The extroverts among us are particularly challenged. I totally get it. I would look for outside sources of inspiration. Little things you have probably overlooked for YEARS. For me, this was finally taking time to look closely at my physical surroundings. This came in the form of animal life. I began to study and catalog all species of animal, plant, bug, bird, and insect I found around my house and property. It could not believe what I had missed. Two Woodhouse Scrub-Jays nested in the tree outside our bedroom window and my wife and I named them. We followed along as the chicks were hatched and taught to fly. The pair still flies by and waits for us to come and acknowledge them. This little exercise allowed me to reset my brain to something totally unrelated to work so that when it came time to work I was energized and focused.

I’m so tired of online conference calls but don’t know any other way of communicating?

You will laugh. Write letters. I know, I know, throwback. Yes, for sure, but start writing letters and don’t bother telling the recipients you are sending them a letter. Just do it and see what happens.

How do I get feedback on my work when I can’t meet with anyone?

I am a huge fan of mentorship. When we face serious challenges, it makes a huge difference to have someone you trust, someone you admire, to fall back on. I think that ONE serious relationship with a mentor does wonders for when we feel a bit lost.

My spouse is now working from home as well and sometimes it feels like we are both in different worlds. Any ideas for how to remedy this?

This is a great question and I too face the same situation. This might sound cheesy but I’ve found that as long as I dedicate MORE time to thinking about my spouse than I do to thinking about myself the balance and harmony tend to be much, much stronger. If I’m sitting at my desk and feeling tired, overworked, or stressed, I realized that my wife might be feeling the same way. So if I can think about a remedy for her, and I help her first, it tends to make my situation improve exponentially.

I used to do art when I was younger but now my life is much more about business. Should I start up my art practice and how do I do this without embarrassing myself?

Short answer, YES. Absolutely. Art is total freedom, which often runs in direct opposition to the business world. Art is a permission slip for personal expression, and remember, there is no right and wrong. As for how not to embarrass yourself. Just don’t share until you are ready. Just live with your work and see how it speaks to you. Maybe you will share or maybe not. As long as the art is challenging you and making you happy then nothing else really matters.

What if creativity for me isn’t about making anything?

That’s totally fine. I think one of the most incredible things any of us can do is sit and think. Nothing else. No distractions. Just the thoughts in our head. That is how Einstein came to several of his more important discoveries. He gave himself time to “do nothing.”

Any last tips?

I spent most of my adult life as a photographer, so much of what I know from a creative standpoint revolves around professional photography. This means that the rest of the creative world is still mostly unknown to me. Art, design, illustration, writing, etc. There are so many creative people I have yet to discover. I realized being at home was the perfect time to try to expand my creative horizons. So, each week I do research to investigate someone new. Yesterday it was author Joan Didion. Last week it was artist/educator Josef Albers. There is an endless list of people I can learn from.

Explore your creative side with Blurb.

The post Finding New Ways to Be Creative with Dan Milnor appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Keep in mind, putting together a family tree book is usually not a rush job, so give yourself time to enjoy the discovery process. You are part of history in the making!

Pick a type of family history book

There are many different styles of family tree books—from classic family photo albums to long-form narratives. You can include a simple family tree diagram or an extensive list of family members and biographical data. Adding photos, historical documents, and storytelling will make your family history book even more engaging. What kind of book interests you?   

Family tree and genealogy

• “Our family” tree: Photos and brief descriptions of living family members, going back to grandparents or great-grandparents. Ideal for a child’s birthday or graduation gift.
• Individual book: Trace the ancestry of one person, working back through time. Makes a good birthday, graduation, new baby, or holiday gift.
• Combination book: Document the ancestors and descendants of one couple (e.g. your parents or grandparents). Perfect for anniversaries, holidays, and family reunions.
• Descendant tree book: Start with an ancestral couple and work forward to the present day, identifying all known descendants.

Biographies and family narratives

• Family memoir: Photos of a parent, grandparent, or relative, along with stories from interviews, journals, newspaper clippings, maps, and postcards.
• Individual biography: Stories and photos of an ancestor, where they lived, and historical records.
• Annotated journal, diary, or letters: Copies or transcripts of a relative’s writings, with notes on family background and historical events.

Research your family tree book

1. Discover your genealogy

A core part of your family tree book research will involve compiling a list of basic information about your ancestors: names, relationships, dates, and places of birth, marriage, and death. You may start by talking to parents or relatives, but you’ll probably need to consult public records and resources (genealogical search websites, libraries, courthouses, churches) to fill in all the blanks. Look for downloadable templates online to help you create a multi-generational chart, family group sheet, or research log—which are great organizational tools you can share with relatives even if you don’t publish them all in your book.

2. Interview family members

Some of the most unique stories and personal anecdotes may not be recorded anywhere, so you might have to rely on conversations to collect all the details. These family narratives are the real gems that can bring your family tree book to life, so take the time to interview relatives from different generations, if possible. Prepare a list of questions or prompts to get the dialogue going.

Possible interview topics: childhood, school memories, family life, friends and sibling stories, hobbies and talents, sports, music & books, community, work-life and career, wedding memories, raising children, trips and vacations, holidays, memorials, food traditions, native languages, religion, cultural celebrations, songs.

Don’t be afraid to ask follow-up questions or see if your family members have additional photos and memorabilia to contribute to your family history book. 

3. Choose a theme

Remember, you’re creating this family tree book for yourself and for other family members to enjoy reading. So, while it may be tempting to include every last bit of research, you’re better off choosing one person, couple, event, era, or theme to build your book around. Which family stories or individuals stand out to you? If there is one relative that you share a special bond, start there.

Look for anecdotes that capture the personalities or unique qualities of your family members—their goals, hopes, dreams, experiences, or emotions. Your family tree book may contain funny, thrilling, or charming moments along with stories of hardship, perseverance, and triumph. All those details and insights will make a truly compelling family book as long as you organize them clearly.

Create your family tree book

Now that you have your information, it’s time to actually build your book! Here is exactly how to do it.

4. Make an outline

Create an outline to organize your research notes and images before you begin writing. Having a game plan will help you stay focused. If your book is incredibly long or too dense, your relatives will be unlikely to read it all. It’s a good idea to arrange the book chronologically, rather than jumping forward and backward in time, which can confuse readers.

Key elements: book title, foreword/introduction, table of contents, timeline or chronology, family tree diagram, narrative chapters (by individual name, family, or year), list of photos and images, maps, appendices, index).

5. Select photos and graphics

Along with photographs, you may include maps, newspaper clippings, charts, event programs, tickets, certificates, announcements, official documents (deeds, wills), recipes, letters, poems, stories, songs, art, drawings, and diary or journal pages to help illustrate each story. As you scan each item, label the digital file with the family member’s name, date, and description. You may end up with enough information (and inspiration!) to create a second or third volume of your family history book, so organization counts.

6. Write and edit the stories before adding text to page layouts

Type up and proofread all your writing in a separate document first, so you can see how much text you have. Be a tough, yet thoughtful editor—and refer to your outline to keep the story on track. Better yet, ask a friend or family member to read your completed draft and see if any stories need clarification, reorganization, or cuts for repetition. Check for grammatical and spelling errors, too!

7. Create simple layouts and add captions

Think about readability and accessibility when designing the page layouts of your family tree book. Try to alternate long passages of text with a page or two of photos or illustrations. Don’t shrink the images down too small or crowd too many on one page. Add image captions to highlight details that may not appear in the main text. Check out our free templates to get a head start on your pages. 

8. Choose a quality paper and cover type

You’re making an heirloom-quality keepsake that you hope will be passed down through the generations and enjoyed for years to come. For the best image reproduction, choose high-quality paper. A hardcover binding with premium paper can be well worth the cost and truly stand the test of time. Explore Blurb cover types and paper options to find the best fit.

There’s only one thing left to do! Print copies of your beautiful family tree book to send as gifts, share at family reunions, or donate to your local library or historical organization.

For more tips and inspiration on preserving family history, explore these ideas for making a grandparent book.

The post How to make a family tree book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Just like memorable expeditions, great travel photo books come in all different sizes and styles. There are many ways to make a good photo book. So the path you take is up to you. Your album might feature a chronological series of photos with basic captions, or lots of personal stories and historical information, like a narrative travelogue. Some people even scan tickets, postcards, and other mementos to make a collage-style scrapbook.

Whichever route you take, follow these travel photo book tips for great results.

1. Know your audience

Think about the reason behind your project. Are you making a travel photo book to keep, sell, or share with family? Knowing this will help you decide what kind of pictures to include. You may also want to consider how other authors put together their photos and stories for a wider audience. Sri Lanka by Dan Rubin and Folk Tales by Julia Nimke are two amazing examples of unique travel photography books.

2. Organize your photos

If you have travel photos from the same trip on your phone and digital camera, start by organizing your photos and putting them all in one place. Create a folder for each batch of photos, labeled with the year and location. For example, 2019 > Italy > Rome. Then rename your images by date and subject matter. The more organized you are at the start, the easier it will be to find specific photos when you need them.

3. Find a story or theme

Look through your images and see what kind of visual story you want to create. Some photography books tell a story with a clear beginning, middle, and end. Others feature photos grouped by subject matter, color, or theme. There is no right or wrong way to organize your book, but the process will go more smoothly if you choose a direction or focus. If you’re making a travel photo book to share with other people, think about which photos will draw them in and capture all the different sights and experiences.

4. Select and edit images carefully  

It’s always a good idea to organize, crop, and edit your images before you start designing the pages of your travel photo book. When choosing your best photos, be as selective as possible. Eliminate blurry images and duplicate shots of the same scene. Remember, less is more. (You don’t need five photos of the same boat or building.) Try to include a variety of close-ups, panoramas, people, and landscapes.

5. Choose a unique look and feel  

You’re in charge of the look and feel of your travel book. Pick a format, size, cover type, and paper type that makes sense for your project and audience. Are you going for a high-end, hardcover coffee table book? Or do you envision a more informal softcover photo album? If you want a truly luxurious showcase for your panoramic landscapes and breathtaking vistas, choose layflat. Our Layflat Photo Books feature panoramic spreads so your photos can sprawl uninterrupted across two pages.

6. Pick a design tool

With Blurb, you have the option to create photo books on your phone or computer. You can use the Mobile app on your phone, download BookWright on your desktop, or try our Adobe-compatible tools. Explore our free book-making and design tools to find the right fit.

7. Design clean and balanced layouts

Since you’re taking the time to showcase your favorite photos, make sure that you give them room to breathe. A common mistake people make in travel photo books is crowding the page with too many images. A photo collage can be fun for a page of ‘outtakes,’ but typically you want to allow white space between photos if there are more than one or two on the page. You can jumpstart the design process by using our free travel photo book templates to create balanced, impactful page layouts.

8. Add meaningful text and captions

This step might be as simple as giving each group of photos a title or as involved as adding detailed captions, stories, or fun facts. Think about what kind of information could make your story even richer—and which anecdotes or travel memories you want to get down in writing before you forget! If you’re making a gift, consider adding a dedication page or personalized notes.

9. Savor your book

There’s nothing like holding your newly printed travel photo book and flipping through those beautiful pages as all your memories come rushing back. If you’ve been “meaning to” make a travel keepsake for a while, there’s no time like the present. Get started today.

***

Blurb is a print-on-demand platform where you can design and print your own travel books. For more ideas and inspiration, check out the travel photo books by other Blurb creators in the Blurb Bookstore.

The post 9 tips and ideas for creating a great travel photo book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

The more organized you are, the more time and energy you can spend creating your next project. Follow these tips to get your phone photos in order and keep them that way.  

Sort your photos

1. Choose a device for editing

No matter what kind of project you’re working on, it helps to have all your photos in one place—ideally on the device you will use for editing. If you take most of your photos on a camera phone and plan to create your projects on it too, you’re already ahead of the game. After organizing your images, you’ll be able to use Blurb’s mobile app to make a Photo Book on your phone or tablet or try our online tool to create Wall Art in minutes. If you prefer to design books or wall décor with our desktop software BookWright, make a plan to upload and sort photos from your camera phone once a week.

2. Organize image folders by date and project

As you begin sorting images, keep in mind how you plan to use them in future projects. Group your photos by year first, then by purpose, then by place, subject, or event. Give your folders clear, specific names. For example, you might divide 2020 photos into folders: Work, Friends & Family, and Travel, then create subfolders within each group, Friends & Family > Holiday, or Travel > Hawaii. Getting through this first phase of organizing photos on your phone can feel like a big deal—and it is—so use that momentum to tackle the next step.   

3. Delete the duplicates

Time for the slightly tedious but oh-so-essential task of deciding which photos to keep or cut. (We all tend to get click-happy with digital cameras and phones, and it is often necessary to take multiple shots to get the best one, but eventually we have to deal with those extra images.) When you take on the task of organizing photos on your phone, start by deleting the duplicates. Choose the best shot of each subject, and get rid of the 3 to 4 safety shots of the same subject in the same moment. You may have to do this in batches and take breaks, depending on how extensive your photo archive is.

4. Back up your photos

Once you’ve done all the work to get the photos on your phone organized, be sure to create backup copies up on a computer, external hard drive, cloud storage, or all of the above! Get in the habit of backing up your photos regularly, at least once a month if you are shooting often. Doing this in smaller batches ensures that you can keep track of your images and actually get the job done. You may also decide to upload your very best shots to an online photo-sharing website or portfolio, as a public or private album.

5. Stick to your system

The key to maintaining your photo organization is consistency. Hold yourself to the file naming conventions and folder structures you set up, and commit to a regular schedule of downloads and backups. It will get easier the more you do it. And as anyone who has lost digital files knows, it can be heartbreaking, so it’s worth making the extra effort now to ensure your photos are safely stored.

Stay organized

6. Know why you’re taking photos

Now that you’ve got a clearer view of your phone photo collection, you can bring that clarity and intention to your next photo session. Before you start snapping, think about what you want to do with these photos. Are they for a gift? For social media? For work? For posterity? To make a photo book or wall art? Of course, taking spontaneous photos can yield surprising, serendipitous images, but having a digital camera in hand can also make it easy to forget why we’re shooting in the first place. Don’t lose sight of your purpose.

7. Shoot in smaller batches

If the process of sorting hundreds or thousands of photos on your phone left an impression on you (whether it was a feeling of stress, relief, accomplishment, or joy), remember that experience and use it as motivation to take photos in smaller batches going forward. The fewer shots you have to manage at a time, the more likely you are to sort, file, and back them up properly and frequently.

8. Delete as you go

No amount of editing can fix camera blur, interruptions, and closed eyes. If there is a camera shake, someone walking into the shot, or unflattering expressions, delete these photos as soon as you see them. Ignoring them now just means you have to deal with them later!

***

Knowing exactly where to find the perfect photo feels good and feeds your creative process. Ready to start a new project? Bring your vision to life today with Blurb’s help!

The post How to organize photos on your phone appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Chances are, your choice of book cover will be based on more than one thing: personal style and aesthetic, durability, cost, page length, the book’s purpose and audience, and the kind of reading experience you hope to create. Let’s take a closer look at the three different types of book covers available at Blurb so you can find the right fit for your project.

Softcover

The basics

Our softcover books feature a flexible, high-gloss laminated cover and durable library binding. You can print on the front, back, and spine of the book. You know those paperbacks you love to read (and reread) and carry around in your bag because they’re easy to handle? Yep, classic softcover books.

The benefits

It’s a popular, versatile, and economical way to print photo books and trade books. If you’re printing a trade book, the softcover option gives you the lowest cost per copy. Softcover books are also lightweight, accessible, and portable, making them perfect for the everyday commuter, long-distance traveler, and bedtime reader. Many authors and publishers choose softcover designs for novels, poetry, memoirs, short stories or essays, travel guides, comics, graphic novels, literary journals, how-to guides, and art and business catalogs. The list goes on!

The limitations

The softcover design is fairly simple—no cover flaps or end sheets*. (If you’re making a magazine, you can print on the inside front and back covers, as well as on the outside front and back covers.) Softcover is also not available for Blurb’s large-format photo books or layflat books. No surprise here: With heavy use, softcover books are more susceptible to visible wear and tear than hardcover.

Hardcover with ImageWrap

The basics

Our ImageWrap hardcover books feature a durable matte finish and library binding, as well as end sheets*. Your cover image will be printed directly on the front and back cover and spine. You also get a choice of end sheet colors, depending on your book format (two color options for trade books, five color options for perfect-bound photo books).

The benefits

It’s a sturdy, stand-alone book design that looks great on display and stands up to heavy use. For the higher printing cost, you get lasting durability (think: children’s books, cookbooks) and more of a high-end feel (perfect for keepsake albums or photography, art, and design books).

The limitations

What you see is what you get—as in, no cover flaps. If you’re making a layflat photo book, ImageWrap is the only cover type available. Hardcover books are heftier and can be a bit trickier to transport (unless they’re slim). But being heavy is ok for books that tend to stay at home (reference guides, cookbooks, yearbooks, coffee table books).

*What are end sheets? How can they be used?

End sheets are the pieces of paper glued to the inside of your hardcover book, lining the front and back cover. Text and designs cannot be printed here. If you plan to order more than 100 copies of your book, we offer custom book options which may include printing on the inside of your cover.

Hardcover with dust jacket  

The basics

This type of book cover features a full-color, glossy dust jacket with flaps that wrap around your linen hardcover book (slate-grey linen for trade books and a choice of black, oatmeal, or charcoal linen for photo books.) Images and text can be printed on the front, back, and spine of the dust jacket. As with ImageWrap hardcovers, you get a choice of end sheet* colors (two color options for trade books, five color options for perfect-bound photo books).

The benefits

If you’re going for a luxurious look and feel, dust jacket flaps over classic linen book covers adds instant prestige. Some authors choose this traditional design for novels, essays, or cookbooks, while others may reserve it for high-profile art and photography books, keepsake projects, or limited editions. Publishing houses often release first-edition fiction, nonfiction, and some poetry books in hardcover with dust jackets (followed by a softcover edition six months to a year later).

The limitations

There is no option to emboss or print on the linen book covers underneath the dust jacket, but your local bindery or print shop might be able to do this for you. The hardcover weight combined with a removable dust jacket can make this design more suited to books that are not subject to constant, rugged use (a dust jacket on a kid’s book is bound to go its separate way).

Then again, books are made to be loved, handled, shared, and treasured, so there are no set rules about which type of book cover to use for any genre or style of project. That’s for you to decide. To each book, its own unique and beautiful cover!

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform that makes it easy to create and print your books on demand. For more inspiration, check out these tips for creating a standout book cover. Ready to explore size and cover options? Start your book project today!

The post Types of book covers: hardcover versus softcover appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Once you select the perfect image to print, you’ll have a choice of three finishes: Canvas, Metal, or Acrylic. Use our handy guide to find the right look for your wall art project.

CANVAS

Canvas wall art is a popular and truly versatile choice. These archival-quality prints add beautiful warmth, texture, and timeless style to any room. They look right at home in retro décor, rustic interiors, or minimalist, contemporary spaces. If you’re going for a classic, elevated look and feel, canvas prints are a great way to display your best creative work.

What is a canvas print?

We start with museum-grade canvas fabric in a 2-over-1 Oxford weave to ensure a textured, archival-quality finish. Your image is printed directly onto the canvas using inkjet printers, then each print is cure-dried to prevent color fading and finished with a semi-gloss coating for a hint of shine. Wrapping the printed canvas around a sturdy pine frame creates that classic, gallery-style look.

What kind of images are canvas prints good for?

Premium woven canvas lends a softness and warmth that is perfect for keepsake photography and artistic portraits. Canvas prints are also great for photos with a shallow depth of field (where only a small area of the image is in focus and the background is blurred). Abstract designs, landscapes, and illustrations take on a wonderful, painterly feel when printed on canvas.

ACRYLIC  

Acrylic wall art puts your favorite work on center stage with a bold, glossy finish that catches the eye (and the light). When you’re in the mood to see vivid details and bright colors pop, sleek acrylic prints deliver in a dramatic way. These high-quality pieces can bring your walls to life and add a lively, contemporary touch to any home or professional workspace.

What is an acrylic print?

We use optically clear, premium photo-grade acrylic for durability and extra shine. Your image is printed directly onto an acrylic panel using inkjet printers and UV inks. Three backing panels are added to protect and preserve the image. Thanks to a fade-resistant UV flood coating, you’ll see long-lasting brilliant colors and image clarity. Your print comes ready to hang, so no frame is needed.

What kind of images are acrylic prints good for?

High-resolution photos look fantastic as acrylic prints, because all that crisp detail, depth, and authentic color really comes through. These life-like prints are a natural pick for documentary photography, landscapes and wildlife, travel photos, and portraits. The same goes for vibrant scenes with lots of movement (athletes, dancers, kids playing, animals, or bustling city life). Detailed illustrations and graphic designs also look stunning when printed on acrylic.

METAL

Metal wall art is designed to impress with radiant colors, rounded edges, and a lustrous finish. If you have an eye for contemporary décor or unique accent pieces, sleek metallic prints will fit right in. Use these gallery-quality prints to add a burst of brilliant color and modern style to the spaces you love—private dwellings, design studios, and beyond. See best your creative work in a whole new way.

What is a metal print?

We use a combination of heat and pressure to infuse your image into a radiant, ultra-thin aluminum panel with smooth, rounded edges. This thermal transfer process creates a vivid, crisp image with superior clarity. Using a wide print gamut and high-gloss coating also ensures color and authentic reproduction.

What kind of images are metal prints good for?

Try a metal finish for high-color photographs and designs. Vibrant hues and authentic details come to life beautifully on metal prints, whether your photo has a deep depth of field (a large area in focus) or a shallow depth of field (a small area in focus). Printing on metal can give portraits, landscapes, and travel photos a dramatic, modern edge. Geometric designs, abstract art, and dynamic illustrations also stand out as metal prints.

Ready to make your custom Wall Art? Choose the finish that fits your projects and get started.

The post Canvas, Metal, or Acrylic? Choosing a Wall Art Finish appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Making custom artwork is a fun, affordable, and creative way to decorate bedroom walls. If you create a sleeping space that is comfortable and stylish, you can start and end each day feeling refreshed, inspired, and ready to go! Check out our top bedroom wall decor ideas.

1. Mosaic wall art

Draw inspiration from classic tile and photo mosaics for your bedroom wall decor by creating your own series of artwork. For this creative idea, you can build your own mosaic wall art with favorite photos, or apply the grid-style arrangement to a set of small, square images. For rooms with tall ceilings, just build your mosaic art vertically to fit the space.

2. Map art

Infuse your dreams with a bit of wanderlust each night, or celebrate your favorite destinations with this fun twist on travel art. For this wonderful bedroom wall art idea, you can use anything from busy city maps, antique atlas images, or playful maps you hand illustrated. To perk up a plain map, simply add colorful accents or photos from your trip. The world is at your fingertips!

3. Monochromatic art

A popular, minimalist approach to bedroom wall art is to use one color as your inspiration. Create a set of paintings, photos, or collages in the same hue, or choose one standout piece as the focal point. Single-color, abstract art is a subtle, soothing choice for bedroom wall decor. Adding white pieces to a small or windowless room can even have a brightening effect. Think of monochromatic as beautiful, not boring.

4. Garden art series

Just because a bedroom doesn’t have giant windows or natural light, doesn’t mean you can’t bring a touch of the garden inside. For this bedroom decor idea, you can use your own photographs of plants and flowers to spruce up your sleeping area. You can also draw, sketch, or paint your own jungle or floral patterns, or a garden series of your own. Here’s to going green!

5. Art gallery wall

Elevate the look of any bedroom wall with a collection of artwork you love. Your gallery wall can be a mix of photos, drawings, and paintings of all shapes, sizes, and styles. For best results, choose the placement of the largest or most central piece first and work your way out from there.

6. Panorama in pieces

Get ready for an exercise in horizontal thinking! If your bedroom wall space is limited, and the only open spot is above the bed, try this creative take on the panorama. For this creative bedroom wall idea, start with a panoramic photo of your choice and digitally crop it into three, four, or five images that hang in a row. Painters and illustrators can also apply this format to their creative projects.

7. Inspirational words art

What is one saying that you never get tired of? Print a famous quote, inspirational words, or a personal motto to decorate your bedroom wall. This is perfect if you’re working with tight quarters, as you can easily use smaller frames or single words of motivation.

8. Black and white photo series

Nothing says classic and sophisticated like beautiful black and white photography. The subject matter is up to you, but architecture, natural landscapes, animals, and still-life images are always attractive options for bedroom wall decor. Black and white images can also lend a quiet, subdued feeling to a room if you’re looking for bedroom wall decor that’s not too flashy.

9. Framed wallpaper panels

Committing to wallpaper for the entire bedroom can be overwhelming—so why not try a smaller dose of bedroom wall decor? Print wall art featuring one or more patterns to add a pop of color without overdoing it. It’s simple, stylish, and affordable. Plus, you can quickly switch out the panels without a major bedroom makeover.

10. Colorblock painting

Talk about modern, sleek, and contemporary. Color blocks are a simple wall art solution that never goes out of style. Customize your artwork with the color palette and geometric shapes that fit your decor.

11. Floating photo shelves

Sometimes you want to display a few smaller photographs and treasures, but they would look completely lost on a large wall. Instead of using oversized artwork to fill space, install floating shelves in your bedroom for your beloved photos, books, and keepsakes. When the mood strikes, simply rearrange your art collection for a whole new look.

12. Photo light strings  

Tiers of twinkling holiday lights add a magical touch to your photo wall at any time of year. Arrange the strings of lights in rows, cascade them from the ceiling, or trim the edges of a printed photo.

***

Need more bedroom wall decor ideas? Design and print your very own DIY wall art and decor with Blurb. Get started.

The post 12 creative bedroom wall decor ideas appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Name something that comes from the creative world that is perfect on the first try. Are novels written in one draft? Do architectural plans always succeed on the first try? Does a black and white negative get printed perfectly in the darkroom on the first print? Does a flawless painting emerge on a blank canvas the first time the painter applies their oil or acrylic? Spoiler alert: the answer is no. Everything that is born from creativity tends to reach peak impact upon revision. The same is true for making books.

Here are some things to remember when you’re preparing a test book:

1. Determine what kind of test book to make

Anytime I want to make a new book to showcase the best of my artistic ability, I have to decide which features my test book will include. This is the time to address any concerns or questions I have going into the project. What don’t I know how to do? What am I uncertain of? Should I use 10 pt type or 11 pt type? What about my typeface? Should I run images with borders or should I go for the full bleed? I can look at my computer monitor all day long, but the monitor is not the same as seeing my work in print.

2. Make your test version smaller than the real book

Think small. If you are creating a 200-page, 11×13, hardcover photo book, you don’t need to make a 200-page, 11×13, hardcover test book. You can choose a 20-page, softcover, 7×7 with the same paper and still experience how the larger book would feel without paying the larger book price. Look, we all make mistakes. I make them all the time. So why not make the mistakes on a small, informal, inexpensive version of your masterpiece?

3. Think of it as an experiment just for you

Nobody else will see this test book. It does not define you as an artist but rather defines how intelligent your book-making process really is. Talk to any accomplished book-maker about making test books and you will get the appreciative nod of those in the know. The test book should be your playground for the experimental.

4. Include different versions of images and text

Once I’ve determined my story, and the images are ready to go, I take black and white images, toned black and white images, color images, and any scanned additional artwork and I import them into the test book. The book will show me how these different items print on the paper I’ve chosen. Do I need to open up my images a half stop, or lower my contrast? What about the design? I can try different things, but I don’t have to fret about anything being perfect. The same applies to text. I choose three or four typefaces, write a random sentence (like a line of dialogue from my favorite spy movie), and I run that same sentence at 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, and 14 pt for comparison. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve gone back to old test books to guide me in my typography decisions.

5. Stay optimistic and try to have fun

Making a test book can be fun and work as an enormous pressure relief value. So many times, I run into novice book-makers who are afraid to hit print because they worry they’ve made a mistake. As a realist, I always say “The odds of perfection are low, so why not make a test book and take away some of that pressure?” There is nothing more stimulating, more motivating than getting a wonderful book in the mail, but there can be nothing more deflating than getting a book that isn’t quite what you envisioned. So, stack the odds in your favor and try making a test book. Yes, you will pay your twelve or fifteen dollars, but think of the money it will save over time.

What often gets lost in the book-making process is the idea that it should be enjoyable. There are plenty of challenging things in life, but book-making should not be one of them. Sure, compiling a book is often like putting together the pieces of a puzzle, but ultimately it should be a positive experience, and the test book is a strategic, affordable way to make that happen.

Are you ready to print a test book? Choose your book format and get started now.

The post How to Make a Test Book (and Why You Should) appeared first on Blurb Blog.

In short, printed portfolio books tend to be edited better, are generally more thought out, and when I question why a certain image is being shown, there tends to be a more thorough explanation and rationale.

However, does that mean I am recommending you forego a digital portfolio site in place of a printed portfolio book? Not exactly, but let me explain the pros and cons of each of these strategies.

Digital Portfolio Websites

The Pros

Let’s start with the upside of creating a digital portfolio site. Firstly, it’s easy to update, unlike a printed portfolio book which remains the same once you hit “print.” Where this digital advantage comes in handy is when you need multiple portfolios for multiple, potential clients. With a digital portfolio site, it’s easy to present a tailored, refined version for a specific client. It also makes it easy to add in your most recent and up to date projects.

In addition, a digital portfolio website is all about convenience. I never thought I would show my work on a mobile device, but I do it all the time, on planes. If someone asks me what kind of photography I do I can pull out my phone, iPad, etc. and show them my digital photography portfolio site.

Another point to consider is your style of work. If you are primarily a digital artist, then it makes total sense to stick with the screen.

The Cons

A digital portfolio website sounds pretty amazing. How can there be a downside?

Well, I would argue that a great portfolio requires ruthless editing. No superfluous, stray images. With a digital portfolio website, there is unlikely to be a cost penalty for leaving in something that would otherwise have been left on the editing room floor. This is why I tend to prefer printed portfolio books. Often times when I am presented with a digital portfolio site, the first thing I do is look to see how many images are in the gallery. It’s not uncommon to see 50, 75, or even 100 images which is far, far too many. Personally, I would never include more than twenty-five images in a professional portfolio, and even that can in most cases be culled to even fewer.

When presenting a digital portfolio site, you will also need to consider the size of the device it’s being displayed on and the viewing conditions. Not all locations are friendly to the screen, and even a large iPad isn’t that large when multiple people are trying to get a good look at your work at the same time.

So, in summary …

Pros: Ease and convenience

Cons: Less motivation to edit and curate thoughtfully, and may be difficult to present in an impactful way

Printed Portfolio Books

The Pros

Now let’s talk about print. Print requires a different level of commitment and often an additional cost. Once you hit print there is no way to change your book without considerable work. This means that printed portfolio books tend to be edited and curated to a higher level. The artist knows that there is a time and cost implication to everything they choose to include. Not only does this tend to result in a well thought through, impactful piece of work, but professional clients (the kind you want to work with) respect the thought and effort that goes into this process.

Printed portfolio books are also not restricted by screen or device size. Just think about a beautiful book of 16×20 or 20×24 images. Talk about impactful. And, not only can prospective clients see your work as it was meant to be seen, but they have the option to touch and feel it. Print is tactile and offers viewers a new way to absorb your images. Research has highlighted the importance of this tactile experience with some studies showing a 20-30% drop in comprehension between paper and screen.

Printing itself offers unlimited creative possibilities; a chance for you to present your original work in a truly unique way. Maybe you still work in the darkroom and prefer homemade chemistry, or perhaps you use a strange printing profile on your inkjet prints which identifies them as yours. Print is the best way to realize your true creative vision.

The Cons

But print isn’t perfect, right? Nope, not at all. Printed portfolio books, as I mentioned, can be expensive. Printing your work requires time that not everyone can afford, particularly when it comes to tailoring or updating. Perhaps you created a printed portfolio book and realized after the fact that your best image should have been on page one and not the cover. Oh well, might have to print another.

A printed portfolio book can also be heavy and logistically difficult to lug around compared to a digital portfolio site that’s accessible on your phone or tablet. It’s also true that some clients today specifically request that you don’t send anything in print form.

So, in summary …

Pros: Encourages thorough curation and editing, more impactful

Cons: Can be expensive and heavy to carry around

In Conclusion

Are you looking for a moral to this story? Good, because I have one for you. Make both. Create a digital portfolio website and a printed portfolio book. There is really no reason to not have multiple versions of your portfolio in both print and digital forms. You just never know which format will resonate with a particular client.

Finally, I will leave you with this. Enjoy the process. Creating a portfolio is your chance to show the world just how good you are. If you are capable of making great things, and I believe you are, then your portfolio becomes a testament to your talent and something that will be respected by those who know. Best of luck.

Turn your best work into a professional portfolio that will open doors. Create a mini version to leave with clients and a large-format version that’s sure to stand out. Get started today!

The post Portfolio Book or Digital Portfolio Website? appeared first on Blurb Blog.

1. Art gallery wall

Turn your living room or dining room into a personal gallery with a collection of unique wall art. If facing a large blank wall feels daunting, simply follow your instincts, mixing photos and paintings, drawings, and collages as you go. To combine artwork of different sizes, start by hanging the largest piece first, then work your way out from that focal point, adding smaller images to create a one-of-a-kind impact.

2. Panorama in pieces

This one goes out to all the panorama lovers! Get more mileage out of a favorite landscape photo by digitally cropping it into several equal-size photos you can hang in a horizontal row. Depending on how you divide the panorama-style shot, any subject matter will work—from natural landscapes to rooftop views to portraits. It’s a perfect solution for that large wall behind a couch or dining room table.

3. Inspirational text art

Text-based artwork makes for great large wall décor while bringing a burst of personality to the room. Choose a famous quote you love, or put a few powerful words front and center. What words will create the perfect mood in your living room, dining room, creative studio, kitchen area, or kids’ playroom?

4. Black and white photo series

Black and white photography has a truly timeless appeal, so it works with vintage and modern décor. Decorate your large wall with a set of portraits or minimal landscapes, animals, or dramatic city skylines. If you’re feeling a little adventurous, mix in a drawing or painting in the same two-color palette for a cohesive, contemporary look.

5. Floating art shelves

A set of floating shelves add depth and interest to a large wall while offering plenty of space to display your favorite photos, paintings, drawings, books, and collectibles. Curate each shelf by color, theme, content, or mix it up! This large wall art solution works best above a table or sofa, where people are less likely to lean on it or brush against the shelves in passing.  

6. Abstract triptych

Good things come in threes! If one picture isn’t enough to decorate a large wall, keep the creativity going with a whole series. The triptych format traditionally features a set of three paintings that tell a story, but using abstract images makes this arrangement even more versatile and contemporary. Create a single row of three complimentary photos or paintings, adding space in between as needed.

7. Leaning art

When decorating a large wall, sometimes you need an alternative to hanging art. Maybe you’ve got an especially large or heavy piece of artwork, or you have brick walls that are difficult to mount fixtures on. Or perhaps you simply want to avoid making holes in the wall. Leaning photos or paintings against a blank wall is an effortless, modern way to display treasured pieces. Extra-large artwork can be placed directly on the floor, while several smaller pieces can add vertical interest atop a bookshelf, mantle, or table.

8. Photo grid

When you have a whole stack of favorite photos, go for the grid to decorate your large wall. Organize a collection of artistic shots, family photos, travel memories, or milestones into a stunning piece of wall art. You can build your photo grid horizontally or vertically to fit a large, sprawling wall. Photography and design fans might even shoot for the rainbow and arrange their images according to the spectrum.

9. Mixed media collage

Add layers of creativity and color to your walls with a DIY collage! Start with a large blank canvas, and use découpage glue (clear, water-based craft glue) to attach photos, magazine cutouts, paper cutouts, or pieces of fabric. Make your design using simple geometric shapes or lots of intricate layers, and you’ll end up with eye-catching wall art for any room.

10. Pegboard panels

Invite even more creativity into your space by turning a sheet of pegboard panel into large wall art. Pegboard is a budget-friendly material that can be painted or pieced together to fit any dimension or décor. Select your choice of fasteners (try hooks, tape, or string) to hang artwork, objects, plants, and memorabilia that inspire you. This is an especially fun and versatile option for a large office wall.

11. Minimalist white accents 

We often look for colorful artwork to decorate large walls, especially white ones. But white artwork can add a contemporary touch to any interior while breaking up the monotony of a large wall. On dark wood paneling or colored walls, savvy use of white wall art can also have a clean, brightening effect.

12. Washi tape wall art

Try this wall art technique in one room, and you just might go wild for Washi tape! Made from durable Japanese paper, Washi tape comes in a variety of colors and patterns, making it a simple, fun choice for decorating. Apply the tape in stripes or geometric designs to canvas, paper, wood, plastic, or metal wall art (or even the wall itself!) to create one-of-a-kind wall art. Bonus tip: it’s totally removable!

***

Design and print your very own DIY wall art and décor with Blurb. Get started.

The post How to decorate a large wall: 12 tips appeared first on Blurb Blog.

It’s no secret that we live in a digital age. Camera technology is so good we can hardly contain ourselves when it comes to taking pictures, and often times we don’t. But just because you can shoot an endless number of images, doesn’t always mean that you should. I like to keep my film era mentality even though I now work with a digital camera. If I have a picture in the first six frames then why shoot six more? Less to edit tends to mean easier to edit.

It will also help to have a system in place for labeling and finding your images. This will make the editing and curation process a lot easier. If you know where your images are and how to retrieve them, you’re ahead of the game. Get organized with our top tips for archiving your photos.

Tips to help you choose images for your book

1. Know your why

The first step is to define the type of book you’re making. Are you making a professional portfolio or will your book have a narrative or story? Having a clear purpose in mind will make it easier to identify the photos you should include. A portfolio, for example, should be a selection of your best images, regardless of story or connection. Portfolios are often viewed very quickly and usually don’t require more than a dozen or so images.  A book with a narrative, on the other hand, might require three to four times that number. In addition, in order to tell a story, you might need to include images that aren’t esthetically beautiful, but are essential for the reader to fully grasp a message. Defining what your book will be is a major step in choosing the correct images.

2. Less is more

We live in an age of shortening attention spans, and the reality is that many folks, especially those who might not share your love of photography, may not be able to sit through and absorb as many images as we would like. So, be as ruthless as possible. If you have three images of the same scene but can tell the story in one, then just go with the single shot.

3. Include a variety of shots

Try to include a healthy range of images, from the wide-angle to the long lens, the portrait to the landscape. If you look at famous photography books, especially those that tell poignant stories, you will often see a range of image styles to capture every detail. For example, human eyes are engaging, but a landscape may provide insight into where that person lives or even how they live.

4. Get a second opinion

Sometimes it’s hard to make objective editing and curation decisions about your own images. A trusted friend, peer, or colleague can say “Hmm, not feeling this one,” and keep you from including something that doesn’t work.

5. Get real

Nothing beats getting away from your screen and working with hard copies of your images. Once you have a shortlist of photos you’re considering, try printing them out individually and experiment with sequencing or combinations by moving them around. Photographer, Elliot Ross, uses this trick to help him distill his photos down to the bare essentials for his photo book projects.

 “Whether or not a piece of work becomes a book, I almost always lay out the project in that sort of traditional format, because it forces me to carefully consider what the essential elements really are.” Elliot Ross

 Ultimately, choosing images is up to you, the creator. Technically, there really is no right and wrong, only what you feel best completes your vision. But keeping some of these ideas in mind just might make the process more fun.

***

Feeling inspired? Blurb is a print-on-demand book company that helps you bring your book ideas to life. Pick your bookmaking tool to get started.

The post How to choose images for your photo book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

You may know from experience how creativity and wellness work together. Creative activities give us a healthy way to process our experiences and express ourselves. Adding small acts of self-care and creativity to our daily lives can actually reduce stress, energize the body and mind, and help us prepare for new challenges. So, the more creative exploration we do, the better we feel (emotionally and physically). The better we feel, the more attention we can give to creative endeavors. It’s a beautiful cycle!

Here are some great, creative ways to support your health and well-being.

01 Create a calendar of positivity

Instead of filling your calendar with obligations, tasks, and deadlines, focus on small rewards to relieve stress. Use the advent calendar as inspiration, and create your own version (with or without “window” flaps”). Fill in each day of the month with a compliment for yourself, a motivational quote, a doodle to make, or an activity that feels nourishing (Take a bubble bath. Have breakfast in bed. Photograph the sky.)

02 Move to music

Music is a great way to support your well-being. You don’t have to think of it as dancing to enjoy a physical and emotional release. You can crank up the volume and throw a dance party for yourself or put on mellow tunes and do some yoga or full body stretches. Try a jumping jacks or just shake out your limbs. There’s no magic formula, as long as you feel the beat and move your body. Good vibes will follow.

03 Recognize sources of joy

Did you know there is scientific evidence that practicing gratitude can boost your mood? It’s true: People who take the time to notice and reflect on things they are thankful for report more positive emotions, better sleep, more alertness, and even more compassion. Plus, it only takes a few minutes to jot down things that bring you happiness (people, pets, books, hobbies, food, etc.). Turn this into a daily or weekly practice to help support your health and well-being.

04 Make a mood collage

Support your well-being by acknowledging your personal highs and lows. Afterall, it’s a part of being human. Instead of labeling a feeling as “good” or “bad,” try expressing it with a mood collage. Think about the colors, shapes, images, and words that represent your state of mind, and use any combination of art supplies to create your picture. It’s all about the process. So you may choose to keep it, share it, hide it, display it, or discard it when you’re done.

05 Start an herb garden or flower arrangement

Working your hands into soil and focusing on the natural wonders of plant life can be therapeutic, especially if your typical workday involves a lot of indoor screen time or desk work. Spend a few minutes planting seeds in a window herb garden or arranging cut flowers to stimulate the senses, calm the mind, and shift your attention to the beauty of nature.

06 Make a deck of inspiration cards

This exercise is like journaling with a tactile twist. Create your own portable deck of ideas and inspiration, using index cards, card stock, or cardboard as the base. Then add words, quotes, photos, drawings, paint, or collage to each card. The rest is up to you! Carry them in your bag. Draw one for random inspiration.

07 Journal your own way

If you have tried journaling and are not a fan, that’s ok. If you’re still kind of curious and willing to give it a shot, remember a journal can be whatever you want it to be. And it can look different from day to day, page to page. Inspirational quotes. Geometric shapes. Magazine cutouts. Photos. Poems. Drawings. A list of dreams and goals. It’s your creative tool to use as you wish.

08 Try simple forms of meditating

The idea of meditation can be intimidating, especially when tasked with achieving perfect stillness or transcendence. While traditional forms of meditation can provide great mental and physical benefits, your way of calming the mind and increasing awareness might look different. Try focusing on a color, pattern, sound, or object (nothing sentimental) in front of you, and give it all your attention for 5 minutes. A leaf, a blanket, a piece of fruit, a tabletop, a button, the wind, or a candle. Notice its shape, smell, texture, variations, or repetitions without judgment, as you simply breathe.

09 Make a memory box or jar

Combine the best elements of scrapbooking (celebrating memories, storytelling, and crafting) in a 3-D format that gives back in a unique way. Start with a large jar or shoebox (with an opening cut in the lid), and decorate the outside with paper, paint, gems, or materials you love. Then place photos, written memories, quotes, drawings, or personal mementos inside (fill it in one sitting or over several days). Start each day by reaching inside and retrieving a memento to lift your mood.

10 Practice breathing exercises

Clearing the mind and relaxing the body means you can make room for new ideas to flow in. One of the simplest ways to do that is with controlled breathing. Doing breathwork exercises can actually reduce stress, calm nerves, improve concentration, and boost the immune system. Start by sitting or lying in a comfortable position. Then take a deep breath, expanding your belly, and pause. Exhale slowly as you count to five. Repeat 5 to 10 times, and do this exercise throughout the day, as needed.

11 Color a mandala pattern

Add a bit of movement to your meditation practice by drawing or coloring in a mandala, or another abstract pattern. Mandalas are typically circular, geometric designs that contain repeating shapes and symbols, and are used to help focus one’s attention. You can find printable mandala patterns online, sketch your own freehand, or use drawing tools like the classic Spirograph kit to create your own spirals of self-expression.

12 Use a quote as a writing prompt

When you can’t quite find the words to express a feeling or idea, sometimes a quote from someone else can get you started. Maybe it’s a line from a favorite novel or poem, a family saying, a lyric in a song, or a quote by someone you admire. Even a single word or image could get your ideas flowing.

Find even more original ways to stay inspired on the blog. You can start with these 10 creative activities to do at home.

The post 12 Creative Ways to Support Your Health & Well-Being appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Throughout my time at Blurb, I’ve been approached by thousands of excited book-makers, some displaying complete creative confidence and others with a more anxious creative energy. With the first group, I just get out of the way and try not to get trampled. If you fall into this category then by all means, proceed accordingly. But if you fall into the latter category, please allow me to assist in your journey by introducing you to the journal. Often times the novice book-maker or the slightly unsure book-maker tends to apply tremendous pressure on themselves, even when making their very first book.  I hear things like, “Well, I’ve never done this before, but I’m hoping it’s going to be perfect.”

In my mind, that’s like saying, “Well, I’ve never played tennis before, but I’m hoping to make the Wimbledon final.” Highly unlikely. Creative bookmaking should be fun, not nerve-wracking. That’s why I recommend starting with a journal.

Journals are pure. Just you, your thoughts, your artistic notions, and those quiet, blank pages ready for you to fill. Your journal is a safe zone, there for you to be as honest, funny, serious, or confused as you like. The journal doesn’t judge. It’s your best friend during a down time and your crazy friend Eddie when you feel like letting loose. It’s always there. Right there, inside your trusty backpack, satchel, or camera bag. Lastly, your journal is the ultimate testing ground for your book-making dreams. There is no right and wrong with journaling. It is impossible to make a mistake! Where else does this apply in society today? Taxes? No. School? No. Family reunions? No. Journals are the only mistake-free zone.

Get Started

So how does one get started, and how do you make the first journal to book steps? Easy, start now. Like, right this second. I can almost guarantee you that you already own a journal, even if you don’t know it. Somewhere in your home or office is a notepad. Nothing fancy, nothing special. Maybe it’s one of those black and white, speckled over composition books you can find at the grocery or the drug store. Or perhaps you have a yellow legal pad? Anything will work. As for your pen, pencil, crayon, or art device, it also doesn’t matter. I use a fountain pen, but not because they are suddenly popular again. I use a fountain pen because my handwriting is so bad I can’t read it unless I use a fountain pen, which slows me down considerably. Now, write down the first thing that comes into your mind. Don’t think about it, just write. Hey friend, you’re journaling.

Next, write down the first thing you hear someone else say. It could be on the radio, on the television, via your mobile phone, or maybe on the podcast you are listening to. Just write down the dialogue. Okay, let’s move on. Draw the most interesting object you see in front of you. Can’t draw? Me neither, but it does not matter. Nobody is going to see this journal, just you. Draw. Try again. How is that page looking now? Now write over the top of the drawing you just made. I know, I know, against the rules but did I mention there are no rules?  I could stop here, but I won’t. Have any glue? Tape? Scissors? Photographs? You see where I’m going. You can begin using the journal as a lo-fi bookmaking map, experimenting with copy, image placement, image size, etc.

Create Your Space

Now I’m going to throw you one final twist. Stay with me here. Why not make a custom journal as a guide for your Blurb book? I know what you are thinking. Milnor, you lost me and you probably lost yourself. Nope, not quite yet. Because I’ve already done it and you are already looking at it. These images show a Blurb, 6×9, softcover, trade book journal that I made so that I could test out a few things. Now I will use this as both a journal and as a roadmap for using some of these techniques in my upcoming photo book. I also believe there is a magazine living on these pages. All I need to do now is keep experimenting.

Let me recap by saying that journaling is a permission slip for unbridled creative thinking, something that is essential in the book-making process. Sometimes when a journal page feels ever so right, it’s impossible not to feel like sharing it, while other times, the pages are best kept for you and you alone. Either way, start now, take chances, have fun, and remember, there is no right and wrong.

Take the first step. Create your own journal to kick off your bookmaking journey. What are you waiting for?

The post Journaling for creative confidence appeared first on Blurb Blog.

You’ll want to remember everything about this special time—from their hobbies and talents to friendships and silly faces. Plus, your children will enjoy looking back at their own milestones and memories (even as adults), and they’ll be grateful to have a school keepsake book to share with their own kids someday. Follow these steps to create a school days book of treasured memories.

Choose a Theme

First, decide how you want to organize your photo book. Selecting a theme for your school memory book will not only help you sort and curate your photos, it will allow you to create a strong visual story on every page. Here are a few popular themes to get you started.

Preschool or Elementary School Years Memory Book

Include your child’s artwork, stories, certificates, and class pictures, or build the book around one special activity. Add pages with story starters and invite your child to fill in the blanks with their favorite color, game, food, or animal.

Kindergarten to High School Years Memory Book

Make a chapter for each grade to show your child’s personal growth year by year. Document everything from new friendships and favorite school subjects to concerts and class trips.

Milestones School Keepsake Book

A lot can happen in a single year! Record all the major milestones from the first day of school to the last day of class. Include a mix of classroom achievements (certificates, report cards), special activities (concerts or competitions), and personal highlights (losing a first tooth, first bike ride, first school dance).

Hobbies & Activities School Keepsake Book

Maybe your child has unique talents they pursue outside of the classroom. If their days and evenings are dedicated to music, dance, sports, drama, or academic clubs, focus your book around one hobby or activity.

Looking for even more yearbook ideas?

How to Build Your School Days Memory Book

Gather & Sort Photos

Check your camera phone, computer archives, and printed records for any photos you want to include (yes, be prepared to do a lot of scrolling!). Move all your chosen photos to one folder in your photo library and label it with a name and year. Then sort your photos chronologically or group them according to your theme. Remember, you can always create a special section for favorite photos that don’t quite fit the theme. If you love the image, there’s a place for it in your school keepsake book.

Collect & Scan Memorabilia

The kinds of memorabilia you include your school memory book will depend on your child’s activities and interests. Maybe there are school documents or records of achievement you want to preserve, such as awards and certificates, report cards, event tickets, concert programs, sports team memorabilia, or school newsletters. Add some creative flair by scanning colorful drawings and paintings from your child’s art class, or other mementos from class projects. You can take pictures with your phone or scan the items to create digital files for your school days memory book, then add these images to your labeled photo folder.

Choose a Trim Size, Cover & Paper Type

What do you want your school keepsake book to look like? There’s no right or wrong answer, so have fun with it! You might select an 8×10 hardcover photo book if you want that classic yearbook look and feel. Or try making a square photo album that feels like a cute and compact flipbook. If you’re undecided, think about whether you want one or two images on each page or a whole series, and factor in how your scanned memorabilia will fit on different sized pages.

Select a Book-Making Tool

Whether this is your first (or fifth!) time making a photo book, there is a book-making tool to fit your project and skill level. Use our free desktop software BookWright to create a professional-looking school memory book and enjoy creative control from start to finish—no design experience needed. Or use Blurb’s mobile app to autoflow photos from your iPhone or iPad into customized layouts—it’s fast and easy.

Want even more options? Find the perfect tool for your school memory book project.

Design Your Page Layouts

As you build page layouts around your photos, be sure to leave room for art and illustrations, plus a little white space. You want to create beautiful page layouts that balance photos and text, so your treasured memories and milestones really stand out. If you need a hand with that, try our free BookWright templates, so you can easily change fonts and tweak the placement of images while maintaining balanced layouts.

Add Stories & Captions

Here’s your chance to add a little backstory to all those great photos. Your school years memory book may feature chapter titles, catchy headlines, fun captions, or thought bubbles in each layout. Including quotes from favorite books, movies, and music lyrics is also a fun way to add personality. Ask your child to collaborate on this with you!

Print & Share Your Book

There’s only one thing left to do now. Time to self-publish your book and share it with friends and family!

Are you ready to get started? For a fun family collaboration idea, invite your child to help you put together a school memory book.

The post How to Create a School Days Memory Book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

With a few basic supplies, you can create unique DIY wall art to fit any style, space, or skill level. Here are our top ideas, grouped according to featured materials.

Canvas wall decor

Framed canvas panels are easy to come by and offer endless possibilities for DIY wall decor.

1. Color wheel painting

Put your own spin on the color wheel! For this DIY wall art, mark the center point on your canvas, then draw straight lines out to the edges, forming triangular segments (use masking tape to create clean borders for painting). Start with your favorite hue and paint your way around the spectrum, using rainbow colors or mixing in your own shades.

Tip: For a playful twist, add points or petals around your circle to create a pinwheel or flower design.

2. Metallic geometric painting

When it comes to chic interiors, two elements are always popular: metallic hues and geometric shapes. For this DIY wall art idea, grab a framed canvas and apply a solid background color in paint. Then stencil on a basic grid pattern, chevron stripes, triangles, or circles. Add metallic paint accents to create an eye-catching design.

Tip: For a simple, elegant look, try metallic shapes on a black or white canvas.

3. Cutout canvas panel

Skip the fancy laser cutter for this DIY wall art, and trust your creative instincts. Draw your desired pattern in pencil on the back of a framed canvas. (Beginners might want to use stencils or stick to geometric designs.) Carefully cut away pieces of canvas to reveal your see-through design.

Tip: Combine two or three panels with different patterns to make a series.

Photo wall art

Take your passion for photography to a whole new level by making one-of-a-kind displays for your images.

4. Framed hanging photo box

Time to create a dynamic DIY wall art piece featuring all those small photos, Polaroids, or unique-size portraits that would otherwise require custom frames. Simply attach strands of wire, twine, or clothesline cord in rows to a large, empty picture frame. Hang your favorite photos using clothespins, binder clips, or other fasteners, and—voila!—instant photo collage. Plus, swapping out images is a breeze.

5. Decoupage photo art

Bring a dash of color and creativity to any room with decoupage artwork. For this DIY wall art, cut out photos or magazine images of people, animals, flowers, or scenery, and use collage paste to affix them to painted canvas or wooden panels. Animal pictures are a playful addition to a child’s bedroom, and they’re perfect for baby gifts.

Tip: Black and white photos stand out best on solid color backgrounds.

6. Magazine photo collage

Ready to design a real conversation starter? This DIY wall art collage can be a fun collaborative art project if you want to get friends and family together for a craft night. Before tossing old magazines in the recycling bin, cut the colorful pages into strips. Affix them to cardboard, poster board, or framed canvas to create a vibrant collage of text and photos.

Paper and fabric wall decor

Bringing new life to everyday materials and elevating your home decor is easier than you think.

7. Woven paper panel

Weaving is an ancient art form practiced internationally, and it’s always trending in the design world! That’s why you should consider a woven paper panel for your next DIY wall decor project. Use a ruler and craft knife to make parallel cuts on a sheet of paper, leaving an even border all around. Cut colored paper into long strips, and follow a basic over-under technique to create a timeless woven piece. Beginners can find weaving patterns online, while advanced weavers may come up with new designs of their own.

8. Fabric collage art

Let your creative side run wild as you turn old clothing, curtains, or scraps of fabric into vibrant pieces of DIY wall art. Sort the fabric into piles based on colors or patterns, then cut it into shapes of your choosing—animal, floral, or geometric. Stich or glue together the pieces to create a fun scene or abstract design.

9. Painted shapes mosaic

You’ve probably marveled over the intricate details of photo or tile mosaics without realizing you can make a simple DIY version right at home. Cover a sheet of art paper with paint—any blend of colors, swirls, or patterns. Once dry, cut the painting into small shapes, and arrange them into a new design on paper or framed canvas, using glue or collage paste.

Tip: To save time, just use colored paper or fabric for your mosaic pieces.

Wood wall art

Have fun creating handmade DIY wood wall art and decor with precut wood panels or scraps from household projects.

10. Handpainted family monograms

Monogramming adds a classic touch to clothing, bags, and accessories. Why not celebrate your family name with a DIY wood wall art project that can also decorate your home? Using stencils or drawing freehand, trace your initials on a wooden panel, then paint in the letters. Dress it up with classy cursive, go all modern in block type, or add abstract elements to match the room decor.

11. Inspirational text art

Word lovers will enjoy adding a little written inspiration to their wall art. Try decorating a painted wooden panel with a short quote or set of words: KEEP ON SHINING. Love. Dream. Create. The text can be painted on or formed using string, rope, glitter, flower petals, or any material you fancy.

Tip: Use natural, unfinished wood or asymmetrical pieces for a more rustic look.

***

Blurb is your one-stop-shop for art—and self-published books. Design and print your very own DIY wall art and decor with us today. Get started.

The post 11 DIY wall art and decor ideas appeared first on Blurb Blog.

A striking comic book cover can also go a long way toward generating sales, so give yourself time to get it just right. With our step-by-step guide, you’ll learn how to make a comic book cover that creates intrigue and captures your creative vision.

1. Do your research

Researching comic book cover design is not only fun—it’s an essential part of your job. Explore current comic book trends, and notice what appeals to you as a reader. You can search online, visit comic bookstores, read blogs by comic book illustrators, or ask friends and comic fans to talk about their favorite covers. Once you start examining comic book cover designs with a critical eye, you will see patterns—like which character poses and text placements work well and which don’t.

2. Brainstorm comic book cover scenes

After looking at a range of comic book covers, it’s time to test out some comic book ideas. Think about the cover like a teaser for your audience, and make a list of possible cover scenes that connect to the storyline. Do you want to show the main character alone, with a villain, or in a group? Keep in mind the cover scene on a superhero comic will likely differ from that on a detective series, fantasy narrative, or horror comic. A good cover illustration needs to fit the genre and overall mood of the story, whether the goal is creating mystery, portraying courage, or showing a diverse cast of characters. So, choose the who and what of your cover scene carefully.

3. Select a character pose and viewpoint

Each character’s size, posture, and facial expression can say a lot about their personality and strengths. Drawing the hero larger than life in the foreground suggests power and triumph while drawing them to scale with other characters puts everyone on equal footing. Do you want to introduce readers to your main character in the midst of a conflict, embarking on a new adventure, or striking a powerful pose? Is it symbolic to show them running, jumping, fighting, falling, flying, hiding, smiling, scowling, or staring into the distance?

The tone of your comic book cover can also change depending on whether the main character is facing the reader, moving across the page, or posing in profile. Try different perspectives too, and see which one works for your story. Discover if vantages from street level view, character close-up, bird’s eye view from above, or looking up from below work.

4. Sketch the cover image

Just as you sketched out the interior pages, you’ll want to do a few thumbnail drawings of the cover to get a sense of scale. If your comic book cover features multiple characters in motion or a lot of activity, try to create a visual flow. Remember that the eye typically moves left to right, then from the middle down to the bottom of the page.

You’ll also need to ensure that there is room to add the other cover elements, as noted in steps 5 and 7. These include title, author, logo, publisher, series number, publication date, price, and barcode. Remember, the perfect composition doesn’t always happen on the first try, so expect some trial and error. Experimenting with thumbnail sketches will help you create a final layout that is clear, balanced, and aligns with the content inside.

5. Create a title

Start with a list of keywords related to this comic issue, and try including a character’s name, a conflict, a symbolic object, a place, or even wordplay in the title. Then decide whether you want to add a series name or tagline. Make sure the main title is not too long; otherwise, the layout will feel crowded.

Once you have a winner, choose a title font to fit your comic book. Just as the title and cover image need to work together to create the same mood, the cover font should match the interior font style. Keep the lettering style simple and legible, and avoid adding too many colors, special effects, or shadowing, which can be distracting.

6. Draw the cover scene

If you completed your interior pages, you already know the drill. Using your thumbnail sketches as a reference, draw your cover illustration and title name in pencil first. When you are happy with the outlines, proportions, and spacing of everything, forge ahead.

7. Add the author’s name, price, and publishing details

If you prepared your thumbnail sketches carefully, there will be room to fit all the cover elements without compromising key parts of the illustration. Whether you write these by hand or add them digitally, use a clear, legible font style.

• Name of author & illustrator: The author’s name should appear in a clear, readable font. Many illustrators also include a signature on the cover artwork.
• Logo: Some comic book series include a logo as part of the branding.
• Publisher name
• Series number
• Date of publication
• Price
• Barcode: Leave space to add an ISBN during layout

8. Ink your drawing

Once you have penciled in everything and added all the text elements (or created text boxes to fill in digitally later), start going over your drawing in ink. Use consistent textures, depth, and shading effects that align with the look and feel of the inside pages.

9. Apply a color palette

Choose a set of colors to fit the mood of your comic. If you’ve finished the interior drawings, you know the color palette you are working with. Make sure the colors you assigned to certain characters and scenes match the cover. Bright, vivid, primary colors (red, yellow, blue) work well for straightforward action comics or funny narratives. Rich, warm tones (deep turquoise, navy, magenta, gold, purple) are strong choices for moody dramas or mysteries. A black and white color palette creates a stark, dramatic feel that can work for any genre.

10. Upload your cover

Your comic book cover layout is almost complete! If you’re using BookWright to design your interior pages, now’s the time to add your cover design. This is also the step where you might digitally add text elements, publisher details, or text boxes to your final design.

Blurb’s PDF Uploader is another fast and easy way to create a print-ready comic book. Check out our range of free bookmaking tools to find the one that fits your project.

It’s time to create and print your new comic book and share your vision with fans and friends!

The post How to make a comic book cover in 10 steps appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Life can often seem like a whirlwind of appointments, responsibilities, and tasks, and keeping track of it all can be a challenge. That’s where a personalized planner comes into play. A custom planner tailored to your specific needs can be a game changer. It is more than just a calendar—it’s a productivity tool, an organization system, and a creative outlet rolled into one.

In this digital age, there are countless digital planner creation tools available, allowing you to design and build a planner that accurately reflects your lifestyle and needs. You can add tasks, set reminders, and even integrate other apps that you use daily. But there’s something uniquely satisfying about creating your own custom planner from scratch using traditional methods.

Physical planners allow you to slow down and mindfully write down your tasks, goals, and thoughts in a way that digital tools cannot replicate. You can add personal touches, like stickers, photos, and colorful pens, making your planner a creative, visual representation of your life. Plus, unlike digital tools, you’re not going to get distracted by a pesky pop-up notification when you’re working in your printed planner.

Creating your own custom planner puts you in control, making organization and productivity attainable and enjoyable. This is your comprehensive guide on how to make your own printed planner. Let’s get you systematized—and have fun creatively while doing it!

Choosing your custom planner format

When it comes to creating your custom planner, you have two primary physical format options: homemade or print-on-demand. We’ll go into the pros and cons of each, but know there’s no wrong choice here.

Whether you opt for a homemade planner or a print-on-demand planner, the important thing is that it suits your style, meets your needs, and fuels your productivity. After all, the goal of building your own planner is to create a tool that helps you manage your life better!

Homemade planners

The first option is the good old-fashioned homemade planner. This format gives you the freedom to let your creativity run wild. You can choose your notebook or binder, design your page layouts, and decorate until your heart’s content. This is the perfect choice for those who love crafting and have a flair for design. A homemade planner is also great for those on a tight budget, as you can often use materials you already have at home.

The major advantage of this format is its high level of customizability. You have the power to decide everything, from the size of the planner to the layout of each page. However, this level of customization can also be overwhelming for some. If you’re someone who struggles with decision-making or perfectionism, this may not be the best option for you.

Print-on-demand custom planners

The second option is a print-on-demand planner. This option is ideal for those who want a professional-looking planner without the hassle of designing each page from scratch. There are many online platforms that offer print-on-demand services. You simply choose your preferred design, customize the inside pages, and order it—voila, your planner is delivered to your doorstep.

The primary advantage of this format is convenience and consistency. You get a professionally bound planner with less effort, and you can easily reorder the same design year after year. Note that this format can be limiting in terms of customization. While you can choose the design and layout, depending upon the service you choose, you may not have complete control over every aspect of your planner like size, paper type, cover, and more.

How to create a custom planner at home

Creating your own DIY planner can seem like a daunting task, but with some basic materials and a dash of creativity, you can create a planner that perfectly suits your needs. Here’s a step-by-step guide to get you started.

1: Decide your size and format

The first step in creating your custom planner is deciding on the size and format. Do you want a pocket-sized planner that you can easily carry with you, a classic A5 size to make it easy with the material you have available, or would you prefer a larger, desk-based planner with more room for notes and tasks? 

Next, decide how you want to bind your pages—three-ring binder, disc-bound, or spiral-bound (at a print shop) systems are all popular options for custom planners. Consider the type of paper you’ll be using too; will it be lined, dotted, plain, or mixed? These decisions may seem small, but they can make a big difference in the functionality and feel of your planner.

Also, think about whether you prefer a daily, weekly, or monthly format. This largely depends on how detailed you like your planning to be—but this level of detail needed can inform the size and format of your book. Remember, the goal is to create a planner that best suits your needs, so choose a format that aligns with your lifestyle and planning habits.

2: Gather your materials

Once you’ve decided on the size and format, the next step is to gather your materials. Here’s a list of things you might need. Don’t worry if you don’t have everything on this list—this is just a starting point to give you an idea of what you might need.

• Printer: If you’re printing your planner, make sure you have a printer and plenty of paper.
• Paper: Pick from lined, dotted, plain, or mixed. And consider using thicker paper for a more sturdy feel.
• Hole punch: If you’re using a binder or disc-bound system, you’ll need a hole punch to fit your binding needs. If you’re doing a spiral-bound option, we’d suggest just going to your local print shop and letting them do the heavy lifting.
• Binder or discs: Depending on your binding choice, you’ll need a binder or discs to keep your pages in place. Binders are those things you use in school to keep loose paper tidy. And disc-binding relies on round discs with a little lip on the edge to hold the pages together.
• Dividers: If you want to separate sections of your planner, dividers can help keep everything organized.
• Scissors and glue: For trimming, cutting out, and gluing in any extra pages or designs.
• Ruler: You’ll want a ruler for drawing lines and keeping things neat.
• Pens and markers: Get creative with different colors and styles. Color coding can be a great way to organize your custom planner. Don’t forget about highlighters, too!
• Stickers, washi tape, decorative items: These are great for adding fun and color to your planner. Decorative items like photos, magazine clippings, and Post-its can add a personal touch, too.

3: Design your layouts

The next step in creating your custom planner is designing your layouts. If you’re artistically inclined, draw your layouts by hand. Spend a lot of time here, as this is the fun part!

And if you’re not confident in your drawing skills, don’t worry—there are plenty of free printable templates available online. You can also use design software like Canva to create custom layouts.

When designing your layouts, keep in mind the purpose of each page. Do you want a weekly spread for appointments and tasks, or would you prefer a monthly overview for big-picture planning? You can also add pages for goal setting, habit trackers, and journaling. Consider your planning needs and customize the layouts accordingly.

4: Assemble your planner

Once you’ve printed or drawn your layouts, it’s time to assemble your custom planner. If you’re using a binder, simply punch holes in your pages and add them to your binder.  If you’re using a disc-bound system, use the hole punch to fit your chosen discs. And, if you’ve opted for a spiral-bound option, take your pages to the print shop and let them handle the binding process.

Assemble your planner in sections, starting with the cover and then adding each section accordingly. Use dividers to keep everything organized. Remember to leave some blank pages at the end for any notes or ideas that may come up while using your planner.

5: Personalize your planner

The final step in creating your custom planner is personalizing it. This is where you can really let your creativity shine. Decorate your planner with stickers, add tabs for easy navigation, or even include a pocket for important documents. Remember, this planner should be a reflection of you and your lifestyle, so don’t be afraid to make it your own!

How to create a print-on-demand planner with BookWright

If the DIY route seems like too much work, or if you’re after that professional touch, consider building your custom planner using a print-on-demand service. Since that’s what Blurb is all about, we’ll explore how to create one in BookWright. This easy-to-use bookmaking software has everything you need to create a custom planner that is incredibly polished.

1: Download BookWright and select a project

First, head to Blurb and download BookWright for free. Install it on your computer following the prompts.

Once you’ve installed BookWright, launch the application and select Create. Then choose Notebooks* as your project type. This format is perfect for creating planners due to its flexible sizing and affordable printing options. Select your preferred size, then hit Next. Now you are able to choose your paper style (with options like lined, grid, and more) and cover type (hardcover or softcover).

Finally, name your project, save it somewhere you’ll be able to find it, and hit Start a New Project.

*Psst. If you’re planning to sell your planner on Amazon via Blurb, you’ll need to choose Photo Book.

2: Customize your pages

Once you’ve started your project, you can start customizing your pages. Use the toolbar above your page layouts to add text boxes, images, shapes, and more. Here are a few ideas on how to use BookWright’s features.

• Background color: Use the paint can icon in the upper right of BookWright to experiment with the background color feature and brighten up your book design.
• Photos and text boxes: Add text boxes and images to create spaces for featuring images and headlines.
• Images and designs: Simply drag and drop your photos, images, and doodles into the photo boxes you created.
• Custom fonts: Try special lettering and fonts—especially great when adding inspirational quotes to keep you motivated year-round.
• Shapes: Use the shapes tool to add squares, circles, and triangles. They not only add visual interest, but they can also call attention to special notes and reminders.
• Page numbers: Don’t forget to add page numbers to keep your planner organized. Using page numbers plus an index equals a very orderly year ahead!

Last, but not least, don’t forget to try templates. You’ll find plenty of professionally made layout options for planners, indexes, quotes, tables of contexts, and more in BookWright.

3: Design your cover

Now that your pages are designed and customized, it’s time to create the cover. Remember that you’ll be looking at it all year round, so make sure it’s something you adore.

Use the toolbar above your cover layout to add images, text, or even a background color. Try using an eye-catching font for your planner title and add a personal touch with an image or doodle that represents you. And don’t forget your spine, which you can customize so it stands out on your bookshelf.

4: Preview and order

On to the finishing touch—previewing and ordering your planner. BookWright offers a preview option that allows you to review your entire book, page by page. This is where you can catch any typos or design errors before sending it off for printing.

Once you’re satisfied with your planner, hit the Upload icon in the upper right corner of BookWright, and Blurb will print your custom planner and deliver it right to your doorstep. Easy peasy.

5: Personalize your printed planner

Planners are made to be used. Just like with a custom planner, you should make yours even more your own by adding notes, doodles, and stickers throughout the year. Grab some markers or watercolor to add artwork to blank pages, hand letter important dates, or even create a vision board for your goals.

Don’t forget sticky notes, washi tape, and other stationery to really make it pop. The possibilities are endless! And when the year is over, you’ll have a customized planner filled with memories and milestones that you can look back on.

6: Selling your planner

You’ve spent a lot of time perfecting your planner, why not share it with the world? Selling your work can be a great way to share your creativity and design skills, and maybe even make some money. It’s pretty easy via Blurb.

• Blurb Bookstore: When you upload your project, you will have the option to add it to the online bookstore. Set a price that includes the profit you’d like to make on each sale, and then share it with friends, family, and social media followers through a direct link.
• Amazon: Once your project is uploaded, Blurb offers an option to distribute your planner on Amazon as well. Note that Amazon will take a chunk of your sales, and you’ll need to print your planner as a photo book, so consider this when setting your price and choosing your format.
• Physical bookstores: If you dream of seeing your planner on the shelves of physical bookstores, do it via Ingram. When you choose to distribute your planner through Ingram, it will be included in Ingram’s catalog, making it available to over 39,000 retailers and libraries—both online and physically around the world. There are also fees associated with Ingram, and you can only make your planner a trade book or notebook, so pay attention to your price and format.

Each of these options has its own advantages and requirements, so consider which one might be the best fit for you and your planner. Whichever you choose, remember that marketing your planner—through social media, blogging, or other channels—is key to generating sales.

Using your planner effectively

Now that you have your custom planner in hand, how do you make the most of it? Here are some tips to ensure that your DIY planner becomes a valuable tool in organizing your life.

Add functional features

A custom planner can be more than just a calendar and to-do list—it can be a comprehensive tool to manage all aspects of your life. Here’s a non-exhaustive list of the features we’ve tried over the years.

• Goal-setting pages: With goal-setting pages, you can clearly articulate your ambitions and track your progress throughout the year. Break down large goals into manageable steps, and celebrate your victories, big or small.
• Budget trackers: Oversee your income and expenditures at a glance. It helps foster financial responsibility, aids in saving for future goals, and could help prevent unnecessary spending.
• Meal-planning sections: These can help you plan nutritious meals ahead, save time on grocery shopping, and reduce food waste. Plus, it’s a great way to discover and record new recipes.
• Fitness trackers: A dedicated section to track your workouts, steps, or overall physical activities can help encourage a healthier lifestyle. They can even provide a visual representation of your efforts and improve your commitment to regular exercise.
• Gratitude log: Science has proven there are tons of benefits to practicing gratitude. Make it easier with a special place for your daily log.
• Reading or movie lists: For the avid reader or moviegoer, a section like this can be extremely handy. It’s a place to jot down recommendations, note progress, and write down your reviews.
• Mood trackers: By marking your daily moods, you can spot patterns, understand triggers, and work towards emotional balance. A mood tracker is also beneficial for mental health check-ins.

Plus, we mentioned adding pockets above, and we’ll mention them again! Adding places where you can store loose pages or paste in polaroids or other memorabilia is a great way to keep your custom planner feeling exciting to use. You can DIY your pockets or purchase some online to stick onto the interior of your covers.

Stay organized

We’ve all started a new planner with high hopes, only to abandon it a few weeks in. But the key to staying on track with your planner is getting organized and staying that way.

• Prioritize and categorize: Begin by jotting down all the tasks you need to accomplish and categorizing them based on their urgency and importance. This will help you prioritize and assign deadlines to your tasks. Use color codes or symbols to differentiate between your personal, professional, and social life tasks.
• Get consistent: Make it a habit to check your planner first thing in the morning and last thing before you wind down for the day. Consistency ensures you’re always aware of your upcoming tasks and deadlines, and can help you sleep better knowing you’re prepared for the next day.
• Mind dump: Sometimes, our minds are so cluttered with thoughts that it can feel overwhelming to even start planning. Take a few minutes each day to write down every thought, task, or idea that comes to mind—allowing you to clear your head and prioritize tasks for the day.
• Review and reflect: Take time at the end of each week or month to review your planner. Reflect on what worked, what didn’t, and how you can improve your planning strategy.
• Reward yourself: Don’t forget to reward yourself for completing tasks or reaching goals! This will help motivate you and keep you excited about using your planner.
• Be flexible: Life happens, and plans change. Don’t be afraid to adjust your planner accordingly. Be flexible and open-minded, and your planner will become a helpful tool for adapting to any situation.

Remember, the goal of your custom planner is to simplify your life, not complicate it. So, if something isn’t working, don’t be afraid to adjust and adapt your planner to better suit your needs.

Pair productivity methods with your planner

Productivity can be a loaded term. It can be a useful way to manage your time or a negative loop that makes you feel you aren’t doing enough. Use productivity methods that work for you and your lifestyle, make you feel more spacious and free, and pair them with your planner to help you stay on track.

Here are a few popular methods that you can actually add to your custom planner and track throughout your day or month! You can also mix and match these methods to create a unique planning strategy that works for you.

• Pomodoro Technique: This method breaks your workday into 25-minute chunks with five-minute breaks in between. After four “pomodoros,” take a longer break of 15-30 minutes. The Pomodoro technique helps improve focus, reduce burnout, and encourage regular breaks.
• Time blocking: This method involves dividing your day into blocks of time for specific tasks or activities. It helps improve time management skills and prevent multitasking, leading to better focus and productivity.
• Bullet journaling: A popular method of planner organization, bullet journaling is a creative way to track tasks, goals, habits, and ideas. It involves using a system of bullet points, symbols, and lists to organize your planner in a way that works for you.
• Kanban boards: A visual method of tracking tasks and progress, Kanban boards use cards or sticky notes to represent tasks moving through stages (like To-do, In Progress, Completed). They help improve workflow management and provide a clear overview of tasks and progress.

There are many other productivity methods out there, but the key is to find one (or a combination) that works for you. Incorporate these methods into building your planner to make it more efficient and personalized. If you’re not sure where to start, this productivity method quiz can be a great beginning.

Wrapping it up

Creating your own custom planner, whether through a DIY process or using a print-on-demand service provides a tangible tool that is tailored to your individual needs and lifestyle. As we navigate the fast-paced digital world, the value of a physical planner cannot be overstated. It offers a tactile experience that fosters connection, focus, and mindfulness.

Unlike digital tools, a physical planner is free of distractions. It allows you to step away from the screen, engage with your thoughts, and focus on your plans in a peaceful and concentrated manner. The act of physically writing helps to reinforce memory, promoting a better recall of tasks and commitments.

Furthermore, a personal planner, with its customized sections and features, can be a direct reflection of you as a unique individual, resonating with your creative spirit. So, embrace the process of creating your custom planner—it’s not just about staying organized, it’s about expressing yourself and taking control of your life in a way digital tools can’t replicate.

***

Blurb is a self-publishing platform that empowers you to create, publish, share, and sell high-quality photo books, trade books, and magazines in both print and digital formats. With intuitive design tools and flexible options, Blurb is perfect for DIY enthusiasts who wish to bring their custom planner ideas to life. Whether you are making a planner for personal use or even to sell to your fans, Blurb gives you the tools to make a planner that is functional, beautiful, and uniquely yours.

The post How to create your own custom planner appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Your memory book can be anything you want it to be. Grandparents may find great joy in creating a keepsake that documents their life journey. Kids may want to collect drawings, photos, and mementos into a gift book for their grandparents. Use the following tips to build your own family photo book one beautiful page at a time.

1. Choose a theme for your grandparent memory book

To guide your book-making process, start by selecting a theme that is meaningful to you. Do you want to create a family tree book that traces your genealogy? Or, do you have a set of family recipes that capture rich culinary traditions? Do you enjoy writing down memories in journal form, or do you prefer to tell stories using photos? For writers and storytellers, a collection of inspirational quotes, personal anecdotes, or family adventures might even be the way to go. Check out our list of grandparent memory book ideas for tips on each type of album.

2. Gather your photos and memorabilia

You can invite family members of all ages to help with this part of the project. Collect all the photos, postcards, tickets, stamps, invitations, letters, and mementos that fit your book’s theme. If you come across vintage family photos that do not include dates or names, ask your relatives to help you fill in the missing information. Gathering family history can take time, but it is worth it to have a detailed collection of pictures and stories all in one place.

3. Include significant life stages and events

Organize your grandparent memory book in a way that makes capturing and sharing stories easy. In most cases, that means putting everything in chronological order. For a family tree book or grandparent journal, create a page or chapter for each category or stage of life (add these in list form or as narrative stories):

• Grandparent’s childhood: birthplace and birth date, nicknames, siblings, family life
• Education and early life: favorite subjects, hobbies, sports, talents, goals, graduation
• Great grandparents: names, birthdays, personality traits, education, occupations, talents
• Significant accomplishments: jobs, promotions, awards, volunteer/charity work
• Wedding proposal and ceremony: date, location, guests
• Children: names, birthdays, personality traits, education, occupations, talents
• Special moments with family: vacations, holidays, reunions, memorials
• Culture and traditions: native languages, celebrations, songs, books, quotes, recipes/food

4. Add prompts or questions to encourage storytelling

Some people will be ready to share memories in great detail, whereas others may need a little guidance. Create a list of questions or prompts to encourage loved ones to keep the stories coming. You can also invite kids to think of questions they want to ask their grandparents. The following story-starters are great additions to family tree books, grandparent journals, and photo books.

When I was a child, I liked to . . . 

One of my favorite memories is . . . 

I remember when . . . 

Growing up, my idol was . . .

One of my proudest moments was . . .

My favorite book/song/film was . . .

I always loved to visit . . . 

5. Download a free book-making tool

Once you decide which memories to include in your grandparent memory book, it’s time to start designing your book pages! Choose the Blurb book-making tool that fits your project, timeline, and experience level.

BookWright: Use our free desktop publishing software to create a custom photo book or trade book. Built-in tutorials, tips, and starter templates make it easy to design professional-quality page layouts.

Short on time? Download the Blurb Mobile app on your iPhone or iPad to create, print, and share a photo book in minutes. Simply autoflow your photos into pre-designed layouts, then add your own captions.

Adobe InDesign Plug-In: Create Blurb-ready templates and upload your memory book project, all without leaving InDesign.

Adobe Lightroom Book Module: Make a gorgeous photography book without leaving the Lightroom workflow.

6. Leave room for handwritten notes

You may want to add a few personal touches before you pass along your keepsake. The opening pages can be reserved for dedications from each family member to the grandparent, or from a grandparent to a grandchild. If you are making a grandparent memory book for a special occasion, provide a little context for future readers. And finally, remember to leave a few blank pages in between sections of photos, so kids and adults can add handwritten notes, memories, or illustrations.

Are you ready to make a personalized grandparent memory book? Create from the heart, and see what inspires you!

The post How to Make a Grandparent Memory Book appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Check out our expert tips and step-by-step guide for self-publishing an illustrated children’s book.

Master your artistic medium

Chances are, you already have one or more favorite methods of illustration. Ink, pencil, watercolor, charcoal—each allows you to bring a unique level of detail, texture, shadow, color, intensity, and nuance to images. Illustrators who choose to work digitally, or combine hand drawings with digital elements, also have their preferences for tools and techniques that give them the most control or flexibility.

Before you begin a book-length illustration project, make sure that you select the artistic medium and drawing tools that you are most comfortable with. Then practice, practice, practice until you reach a level of mastery that allows you to produce consistent drawings, page after page. You don’t want to experiment with new techniques or change the quality of illustrations halfway through illustrating a book!

Develop your own style

To succeed in becoming a children’s book illustrator, you need to create captivating images that are recognizable and reflect your unique point of view. Are there certain characters, animals, objects, or scenery that you love drawing? Follow that impulse. Your readers can tell when you let your creativity and imagination run wild, and they will appreciate illustrations that have a distinct perspective.

Many adults still remember favorite children’s book illustrations from their youth, which is a good indicator of a memorable drawing style! Think about the books and illustrations you were drawn to as a kid and the ones that inspire you now. What makes each of these works stand out in terms of character, action, color, and composition? The more you understand what makes you connect with a book, the better you will be able to develop a personal style of your own.

Make the pictures and story work together

Whether you love fantasy or fairy tales, realistic drawings, or quirky cartoons, the strength of your book relies on a combination of text and visual elements. The drawings and story support one another and add details, but neither overshadows the other. As you depict certain action scenes or settings, remember that some information may be revealed in the illustrations that is not present in the text, and not all details in the text need to be repeated visually. Finding the right balance is what keeps readers interested!

Choose a fitting color palette and style

Make sure the drawing techniques and color palette you’ve chosen work together to convey the overall mood and energy of the story. For example, soft, wispy, pastel watercolors pair well with a quiet tone of voice and a calm or ethereal story setting, whereas sharp lines and bright, bold ink colors lend a more playful, active quality to the story. Getting just the right mix of color, style, action, and emotion can take time and experimentation.

Prepare for revisions

One universal hallmark of being a creative professional also applies here: Expect to revise your artwork (and expectations) along the way. No matter how brilliant your idea seems at the outset, even the best projects involve multiple drafts before emerging as a full-fledged book. Your first (or second or third) illustrated children’s book is likely to undergo several rounds of editing. Try not to get frustrated or panic, and instead think of each revision as an opportunity to make your work even better!

Seek out publishing tips and business advice

As a self-publisher, you forego publishing contracts and agents in exchange for complete creative and financial control over your projects. However, that means you take on the responsibility of producing and promoting your own book. Make time to research industry tips, read articles by successful illustrators and editors, or consult a local group of aspiring artists like you. It’s helpful to gain insights from and bounce ideas off other people as you navigate the world of self-publishing. Once you find a community of people that are familiar with the artistic side and the business side of things, you can find ways to balance your passion with your profit potential. Believe it or not, you don’t have to sacrifice one for the other!

Be persistent and stay positive

The process of writing, illustrating, designing, self-publishing, and marketing a children’s book is not an easy road—but it does provide a great opportunity for creative expression and professional growth. As you encounter new challenges or delays, try to be patient, and remind yourself how much you are learning along the way. Developing your idea into a cohesive story and finalizing the illustrations may take much longer than expected, especially if this is your first time creating a book. Brace yourself for long hours—some illustrators estimate as many as 800 to 1,000 total hours of work per book! At the end of a demanding workday, try to look on the bright side, and you’ll find that a realistic and positive attitude can go a long way in this creative endeavor.

Use social media to boost your visibility and inspiration

One of the fastest ways to establish a following in the digital era is by creating a footprint on social media. Share your illustrations in progress on Instagram, tease creative techniques or conversation topics on Twitter, and befriend fellow artists and authors on Facebook. When you engage with the public, you can cultivate a potential audience and create opportunities to connect with like-minded creatives. After all, you never know who might stumble across your posts and decide to follow or retweet you.

Don’t be afraid to collaborate

You may have a knack for all things illustrated, but that doesn’t mean you need to be an expert in storytelling, book layout, or advertising. Consider hiring a team of professionals who support your book project and can put their specific expertise to work for you.

If someone else is authoring the text of your book, try to remain open to their feedback as you draft your illustrations. Collaboration can be successful if you establish strong lines of communication, recognize each other’s creative strengths, and direct your energy toward achieving a common goal: a successful children’s book that works as a whole.

Map out a plan to create your book

As with any creative project, it helps to visualize the steps of illustrating a children’s book before you begin.

1. Start with sketches and a mood board: Look for influences and inspiration everywhere (lighting, movement, color, and composition), as you explore different ways of drawing your characters and backgrounds. Practice a range of facial expressions, postures, and moods for each character.
2. Outline the story: Make sure you have a clear idea of the book setting, character motivation, main action, and story resolution. No matter how expressive the illustrations may be, a weak storyline will affect the entire book.
3. Write the story text: Creating a memorable story will involve trial and error. Pay attention to the tone of voice and vocabulary you use, the pace at which the story unfolds, and how you divide up the text on each page. Try writing each sentence on a notecard, so you can play around with text placement and flow.
4. Create a storyboard with thumbnails: Figure out how the book will progress visually by creating a series of small sketches (or thumbnails) in pencil, representing each page of the book. Seeing the entire layout at a glance can help you decide how fast the action occurs, where to use close-up or panoramic illustrations, and when to include a two-page spread. Be prepared to go through several versions of your storyboard, so you get the storyline and thumbnails right before adding color. Remember to leave room for text on each page!
5. Add color to your thumbnails: Apply your color palette to the thumbnails, along with elements of lighting and shadow to see how the illustrations progress page by page. Make sure the color conveys the overall mood and emotion of your story from start to finish.
6. Sketch your drawings: Time to create full-size illustrations! Using your thumbnails for reference, sketch each page of your book in pencil, including the foreground, background, and characters.
7. Finalize your drawings: Fill in the colors, textures, and details, ensuring that the characters and elements appear consistent from page to page.
8. Create a cover image: First impressions count, so think about which character or scene will capture the reader’s imagination and draw them into your story. Be sure to select a composition that leaves room for the title and author name!

The path to becoming a children’s book illustrator will have its ups and downs, so expect to learn as you go (like any hero on an important quest). We look forward to seeing your book in print!

Are you ready to bring your illustrations to life? Start making a children’s book today.

The post How to become a children’s book illustrator appeared first on Blurb Blog.

3 Steps To Start Planning Your Cookbook

When planning your Thanksgiving cookbook there are a few things to consider:

#1 Design

Do you want your cookbook to include photographs or just the list of ingredients and instructions? If you want to include images of your ingredients and the finished dishes, you will need to plan in time for food photography. While this can take a bit longer, the finished product will be worth it when your delicious recipes come to life on the pages of your Thanksgiving cookbook.

#2 Organization

The key to a great cookbook is organization. Start by creating a list of the recipes you want to include, and in what order. For inspiration, try researching different Thanksgiving cookbooks. Think of it as a story that will take your readers on a culinary adventure. How do you want them to begin and end their journey? Most cookbooks start with appetizers and then move on to side dishes, mains, desserts, and cocktails. You might also want to include a table of contents or color code each section to help people find their favorites quickly and easily. When picking your recipes, consider whether there are any traditional family dishes that you want to include, such as a favorite dish that your grandmother used to make. This is a great opportunity to get feedback from family and friends about the recipes they would most like included.

Remember to mark recipes as gluten-free, dairy-free, vegetarian, or vegan for people with food allergies.

#3 Layout

Once you have decided on the key elements you want to include, it’s time to consider how they will look on the page: For a head start, why not use one of our free, professional-quality cookbook templates. Alternatively, our free desktop software, BookWright makes it easy to design your own custom layouts with simple drag-and-drop tools.

:

Make Your Cookbook Your Own 

The food and recipes we share with the people we love tell stories of their own. Allow the personal feel of your cookbook to shine through with some of these ideas:

Idea #1

Include a short introduction explaining why you decided to create a Thanksgiving cookbook and what it means to you.

Idea #2

For each recipe, include one or two sentences explaining why it’s special, where it came from, and any secret tips and tricks that have been passed down over the years.

Idea #3

If possible, include images of original handwritten recipes, or photos of a past Thanksgiving with a finished dish on the table.

Idea #4

Get creative when naming your recipes, incorporating people’s names and family jokes.

Idea #5

Gather quotes about why people love a certain dish and include them in your cookbook.

Cookbook Inspiration

We love Debra Pexa’s family cookbook, Around the Table; A Family Love Story.

Read her story to find out how the process of creating her cookbook ended up meaning more than she expected.

Ready to make your cookbook? Get started with one of our high-on-design templates or create your own custom layout. 

The post Gift a Thanksgiving Cookbook appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Before you get started, decide whether you want this anniversary photo book to be just for the two of you, or a keepsake to share with others. If you imagine kids or family members flipping through it, you may choose to include dates, locations, or even a few notes for context. If the anniversary book is only intended for your significant other, you can be as personal or cryptic with captions as you like.

As you gather photos for your anniversary book, try to identify a theme or way of organizing your project that adds a personal touch. Here are a few photo book ideas to get you started on making the perfect anniversary book:

#1 Relationship story

Perhaps there is a memorable story about the first time you met, or you came into each other’s lives as high school sweethearts. Use this photo album to chronicle the unique events that shaped your relationship early on, and enjoy reflecting on how far you’ve come. If you have been together for multiple decades, this might even involve scanning printed photos from a film camera!

#2 Shared hobbies

One of the joys of getting to know one another is discovering hobbies and interests that you both love. Outdoor enthusiast couples could fill an entire anniversary photo book with pictures from scenic hikes, biking tours, and camping trips. From cooking to concerts, gardening to sports, round up pics of your pastimes and celebrate the activities that bring you together.

#3 Milestone Events

In the course of every relationship, there are particular years and momentous occasions that stand out above the others; engagements and marriage, moving in together, buying a home, or starting a family. You might even include candid wedding or honeymoon photos to give this keepsake a more lighthearted feel.

For a first anniversary photo book, incorporate your engagement, wedding, honeymoon, and first year together. If you’re celebrating a 50th wedding anniversary, your photo album should focus on your full journey together. The wedding is just the beginning. You’ll likely also want to include baby pictures, your family as it grows, grandkids, love letters, the homes you’ve lived in, and even other anniversary celebrations.

#4 Holiday memories

There’s nothing like the first holiday you spend with your significant other. Collect snapshots from every season to symbolize the traditions and values you hold dear. Your photo collection may extend beyond the two of you to include pictures of your kids, parents, siblings, and loved ones. Putting together this keepsake is a way to celebrate the beauty of your intertwined lives and honor your growing family connections.

#5 Favorite places

Whether you have enjoyed traveling abroad or exploring local spots together, there are some destinations that hold a special place in your memory. Dedicate a section of the anniversary photo book to each of your hometowns, favorite cities, best road trips, or epic adventures. You could even include a page or two with inspiration for your next dream vacation.

#6 Things I admire about you

Your partner has been at your side through life’s ups and downs, so sharing your gratitude is a beautiful way to mark your anniversary. Take a moment to write down what makes your partner so special, whether it’s a winning personality, quirky sense of humor, or thoughtful gestures. You two found each other for a reason, and now’s a great time to express what you admire most about them.

#7 Memento book

If you enjoy collecting memorabilia and scrapbooking, this format will be a natural choice for you. Expand on the story behind your favorite photos by adding postcards, ticket stubs, song lyrics, party invitations, and personal notes to your keepsake. Leave a few blank pages at the end to add even more memories!

No matter how you arrange your anniversary photo book, flipping through these highlights will remind you how much your relationship has grown over the years. Hopefully these anniversary book ideas have inspired you to get started. Have fun collaging all the memories that convey your unique journey as a couple!

Ready to make your anniversary photo book? Use Blurb’s free desktop tool, BookWright, to select the best size, format, and layout for your project. Get started today!

The post 7 Anniversary photo book ideas appeared first on Blurb Blog.

If you’re planning to surprise your best friend for their birthday or a special event, be sure to plan ahead (factor in book printing and shipping). Creating a friendship book takes a bit of time, but it’s absolutely worth it to make something you can both treasure for years to come. Plus, it’s a fun way to flex those creative muscles and reflect on good times!

Check out these five steps to turn memories with your best friend into a creative keepsake.

#1 Gather Photos and Inspiration

Depending on how long you and your best friend have known each other, you may need to set aside a couple of hours or a couple of days to get all your photos and thoughts together. Think of the first time you met, road trips and celebrations, as well as hobbies, music, books, and the food you both love. Your memories might include everything from big adventures and personal milestones to quirky sayings and inside jokes. Gather up the photographs, notes, and postcards that symbolize your favorite times together as friends. This first step can feel kind of like a treasure hunt, as you go scrolling through photo libraries and digging through desk drawers. Keep in mind, there are no rules about what belongs in your book. It’s your story of a special friendship, so anything goes!

#2 Curate Your Stories

Do you and your friend share a history as classmates, co-workers, or neighbors? Do your memories revolve around certain holidays, vacations, or seasons? As you sort through your photos, think about how you want to arrange your best friend book. Is there a section dedicated to parties you’ve attended, or cities you’ve visited together? Or do you want to order the book chronologically? Once you identify your friendship themes and start organizing, it’s exciting to see the whole book project taking shape.

Creative tip: Adding the actual concert tickets, party invitations, and memorabilia to each page makes it extra personal. Or you can snap a photo of any special mementos you want to include, and create a collage of images.

#3 Create Captions

A picture may be worth a thousand words on its own, but in this case, your recap of events is definitely worth including. Adding dates, quotes, and personal details gives extra meaning to a best friend book. Keep a notebook handy so you can make a list of headlines and captions for each set of photos. Some memories may involve a valuable lesson learned or compliments for your friend. You can be as sentimental or as silly as you want here—that’s the whole point! If there is a hilarious or heartwarming backstory that accompanies certain photos, write it down in your own words. When you begin your book layout, you can reserve space for these longer sections of text.

#4 Design and Print Your Book

You may be an expert on what makes your friendship work, but you don’t have to be an expert designer to make a stunning best friend photo book. Blurb’s free desktop book-making software offers tips and tutorials to help you realize your creative project. You can decide whether to use pre-made templates or create your own layouts to capture the mood of your best friend book.

#5 Add Special Inscriptions

Time for the finishing touches! This step is optional, but it only takes a few minutes. Once you have your printed friendship book in hand, consider writing a dedication on the first page or a few surprise doodles throughout. You probably remember a school yearbook or a book you received as a gift that contained personal notes and dedications. There’s something about handwriting in ink that makes any book feel extra special. That’s the idea here, too—make it authentic and personal.

Your DIY friend book is now ready to be delivered!

Celebrate your best friend! Make a beautiful best friend photo book quickly and easily with our free desktop tool, BookWright. Start today!

The post Make a Best Friend Book in 5 Steps appeared first on Blurb Blog.

Word count for novels

Let’s start with you writers out there. Instead of talking about page count, we can filter this through the concept of word count. There are exceptions to every rule, but a few common genres fall under the same guidelines for a book’s word count.

As a general rule, book genres like fiction, nonfiction, mystery, and romance will fall into the 80,000 to 90,000 word count range. Is there wiggle room? Sure! However, keep in mind that wiggle room on the short end, because books in the 70,000 to 80,000 word range might be viewed as too short. Although it could also mean you did a solid editing job and the book is finely tuned for delivery.

The same rules apply to the long end. If your book comes in with a higher than normal word count, something in the range of 90,000 to 100,000 words, it could be viewed as too long or poorly edited. Or it could mean that your one book might actually be better as two books. (Who doesn’t love a series?) And what about books with 110,000 or 120,000 words or more? In some cases, this means the book is simply too long and could actually cost too much to produce, although certain genres are given leeway in this regard (think fantasy books and epics).
In theory, the best thing to do is to concentrate on however many words or pages your book needs. That’s it. However, erring too far on the low end or the high end is going to reduce the chances of your book being considered. So try to keep your book’s word count in mind without completely allowing it to impact or alter your narrative or story.

Word count for mystery and romance novels

The sweet spot for mystery, romance, suspense, and horror novels is 70,000 to 90,000 words (200+ pages), because these books typically need to be page-turners. You want to keep readers engaged without giving away too much along the way. That range should give you enough space to set up a premise, establish character motives, and develop a suspenseful plot with surprising twists and clues—all essential qualities of a great mystery, romance, or thriller.

For new and emerging authors, it’s best to stick to the average book length until you get more writing and publishing experience under your belt. Cut it too short and your readers may feel like they’re missing something. Draw the story out too long and you might lose them. The more you write, the better you’ll get at finding the right formula for your work and learning which rules to bend. Mystery writer Agatha Christie is one of the best-selling novelists of all time, as the author of 66 detective novels—and many of her books are just 40,000 to 60,000 words long. Bottom line: experienced authors know their genre well and learn how to make page counts work to their advantage.

Word count for science fiction and fantasy

If you’re writing a science fiction or fantasy novel, your book could fall anywhere between 50,000 to 150,000 words—though 90,000 to 100,000 words (300 pages) is a good target. Books in the science fiction and fantasy genre encompass a broad range of page lengths because there are so many variations in plot structure, series format, and audience. For example, Ray Bradbury’s sci-fi classic Fahrenheit 451 is a fairly compact gem at around 46,000 words, while Stephen King’s dark fantasy The Stand runs a whopping 500,000 words.

Age and reader experience is certainly a factor. The average young adult fantasy book clocks in under 90,000 words, which is 300 pages or less. Many popular titles are even closer to 70,000 words. This is an ideal book length to capture the imagination of school-age readers, without becoming too tedious or cumbersome.

On the flip side, books in an adult epic fantasy series often reach up to 200,000 words. This sub-genre includes stories with extremely long plots that revolve around detailed world building, a large cast of characters, and a complex quest or adventure—all the territory of expert storytellers, like George R. R. Martin (A Game of Thrones) and J. R. R. Tolkien (The Lord of the Rings).

Page count for illustrated books

Now let’s talk about the photographers, designers, illustrators, and artists out there—those who are interested in creating an illustrated book. Illustrated books, in many ways, are entirely different from “written” books, although many of them also contain written sections. Some of these passages are brief and the word count is much less than those of a novel. They tend to come in the form of an essay, forward, preface, or dedication, while others have full body passages used in combination with the illustrations, oftentimes broken into chapters.

Historically, illustrated books have been much more expensive to produce, so things like page count become critical in keeping a book under budget. So how long should your illustrated book be? The best answer is a reflection of that for written books which is “just long enough to tell your story.” Editing your illustrated book is a critical part of the process. Editing ensures that you are only showing the most essential illustrations—those required to guide the reader through the narrative adventure you want them to take.

The length or page count of your illustrated book also depends on a variety of other factors including the physical form of the book itself. Material choices are critical as many illustrated books are viewed as art objects as much as books. Choices like cover type, paper type, the number of books you are printing, and customizations all combine to form an equation of book success or failure.

For example, you might desire a hardcover book, but you only have forty pages of illustrations. If you create this book it might feel like too much cover and not enough book. Opting for a softcover instead might not only allow for balance in how the book looks and feels, but also help you stay under budget. Another way to balance out the parts is to choose a suitable paper type. High-end, archival, fine-art papers tend to be thicker than standard papers, so even with a lower page count, you might actually get a thicker book that balances well with your subsequent material choices, while keeping your project under budget.

Page count for children’s books

Then there’s the colorful world of children’s books. No, you’re not imagining it—a lot of kids’ books are exactly 32 pages. That’s because these illustrated stories are usually produced in page-count multiples of eight. So, you’ll also find plenty of books with 24, 40, or 48 pages, and the occasional picture book with as few as 8 or 16 pages.

Of course this genre is unique because the drawings and imagery are so central, there’s usually only one or two lines of text per page. The shorter the book, the more this writers’ maxim applies: every word counts. You want to create a simple storyline with one or two primary characters, so storyboarding and editing your text carefully is key.

Understanding the importance of book length, page count, and setting a page limit will not only help you structure your story, but it can also make your book more appealing to readers. Like other genres, there are industry standards for children’s books, so adhering to the guidelines will help your book be more competitive in the ever-growing market of kid lit. If you’re counting words, aim for 500 to 600 words in a 32-page book. Anything over 1,000 words and the book might be a tough sell.

Final thoughts

There are a few more things that need to be said. First, self-publishing doesn’t mean you have to do everything by yourself. If you are uncertain about something, get a second opinion. And if you aren’t skilled in a particular area like editing or design, then think about hiring someone for their professional services who does possess those skills.

Finally, enjoy the process. Writing, photographing, or creating books (or self-publishing books) can be a complex process. But putting a book out into the world can be a life-changing experience. Books have been tied to human DNA since the invention of the printing press, and this reality shows no signs of slowing down. Happy bookmakers tend to be productive bookmakers, so don’t forget to have fun. It just might be the most important part.

Ready to make your own book? Layout your pages quickly and easily with our free desktop tool, BookWright. Start today!

The post How Many Pages Should a Book Be? appeared first on Blurb Blog.